JP5339410B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress the deterioration of an interest by sustaining a player's expectation to a display of a combination of bonus symbols. <P>SOLUTION: A prize as a result of one game may be provided according to a symbol combination formed across three or more rotary display bodies displayed stationarily based on a flag in a winning formation state. This game machine includes a constant win induction means, despite a gradually decreasing game state where game media gradually decrease with the progress of a game, progressing the game constantly producing a grand prize period by constantly making a special flag a winning formation state. In the gradually decreasing game, though a flag of a small prize symbol combination is a winning formation state, this game machine is configured to execute a grand prize period producible game possibly producing a grand prize period as long as an external operation is done at a timing for avoiding the emergence of the small prize symbol combination, and a grand prize period non-producible game emerging a small prize symbol combination so as not to produce the grand prize period. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&amp;INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine.

  Conventionally, for example, a medal as a game medium is provided with a plurality of reels capable of performing rotation display and stop display, and depending on a combination of symbols displayed when a stop operation of the plurality of reels is performed by the player A gaming machine such as a slot machine is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a game medium is inserted and a game is started, an internal lottery in which a flag for a bonus combination (hereinafter referred to as “bonus flag”) can be established with a predetermined probability. Done. When a bonus flag is established as a result of the lottery, a bonus symbol combination corresponding to the bonus flag is displayed in a game after the game in which the bonus flag is established (hereinafter referred to as “the game”). When the stop operation is performed, the bonus combination is won. Further, when a flag for a small role (hereinafter referred to as “small role flag”) is established as a result of the lottery, a combination of small roles corresponding to the small role is displayed in the game in which the small role flag is established. If a stop operation is performed as shown, the small role wins.

  Furthermore, a gaming machine in which a predetermined effect is performed according to the result of the lottery has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, the winning flag is suggested by the predetermined effect, so that the player performs a stop operation (so-called “pressing”) so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning flag is displayed. Is called. Against this background, gaming machines such as slot machines have been difficult to catch for those who are not confident in their prospects.

JP 2005-137604 A

  According to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above, when a winning flag is suggested, a winning combination is won by displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the winning flag. It becomes possible to make it. However, since it is common that the probability of establishing a bonus flag is set low, if a bonus flag is not readily established, there are endlessly meaningless games in which it is determined that a combination of bonus symbols will not be displayed. It can be done. Moreover, if it is difficult to establish a bonus flag in this way, but it is suggested that some flag has been established, but it has failed to push forward, it may be a disappointment for the player. There is nothing, and there is a risk that interest will decline.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to suppress a decrease in interest by maintaining a sense of expectation for displaying a combination of bonus symbols.

A gaming machine according to claim 1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is characterized in that three or more rotating display bodies each having at least a plurality of grand prize symbols and a plurality of small role symbols, and one or more of a plurality of flags. The lottery means for performing the lottery regarding the establishment of the flag of the flag, and the three or more rotation display bodies provided corresponding to the three or more rotation display bodies, each of the three or more rotation display bodies in the rotation display state by an external operation Stop operation means that can be individually stopped, table storage means for storing a plurality of slip tables in which slip information based on a flag in a winning establishment state and the timing at which the external operation is performed, and the winning establishment state Stop control means for performing stop control of the rotation display body based on any one of the plurality of slide tables so that a symbol combination corresponding to the flag in FIG. Based on the combination of symbols across stopped and displayed the three or more rotary display member, and awards providing means for providing a prize as a result of one game, among the combination of a plurality of Grand symbols corresponding to Award flag, Based on the fact that any combination is shown, a grand prize period generating means for generating a grand prize period in which a game to which the award can be given is performed over a plurality of games, and a gradually decreasing game state in which game media gradually decrease as the game progresses However, there is always a winning invocation means for allowing the game to proceed while the grand prize period can always occur by setting the grand prize flag in the winning establishment state, and the lottery means is in the gradually decreasing game state. In order to avoid frequent occurrence of the grand prize period, a winning combination flag corresponding to the combination of small winning symbols that can be always expressed is further established. In addition to performing a lottery that can become a state, the ever-winning means has performed the external operation at a timing at which the combination of the small role symbols is avoided even though the small role flag is in a winning state Only when the combination of a specific grand prize symbol among the plurality of grand prize symbols is displayed, a game capable of causing the grand prize period can be generated, and the small role symbol is always displayed so that the grand prize period does not occur. And a stop period control unit configured to be capable of executing a grand prize period non-occurrence game in which a combination is shown, and the stop control means is configured to execute a first of all the rotation display bodies in a rotation display state in the grand prize period occurrence game Even if both the grand prize symbol and the small role symbol are displayed on the basis of the external operation of the rotation display body of When the grand prize symbol is not the specific grand prize symbol, at least the first rotary display body is in the stop display state and the two or more rotary display bodies are rotated and displayed among all the rotary display bodies. When the state is in the state, the second rotation display body which is one of the two or more rotation display bodies is the timing at which both the grand prize symbol and the small role symbol can be expressed. Even when an external operation is performed, in order to keep secret that the game is a game that can occur during the grand prize period, the combination of the grand prize symbols is always performed when all the rotating display bodies are in the stopped display state. And the second rotation display based on the secret back table which is one of the sliding tables so that only the possibility that the combination of the small role symbols is expressed among the combinations of the small role symbols remains. Characterized in that it has a game mode secret means for performing stop control.
The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising start operation means for starting the game, wherein the lottery means is a predetermined random number based on the operation of the start operation means. And using the acquired random number, a lottery for the establishment of winning for the one or more flags is performed.
The invention according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising an effect display means for displaying a predetermined effect image.

  The gaming machine described in this means includes three or more rotation display bodies and lottery means. Each of the three rotating display bodies is provided with a plurality of types of grand prize symbols and a plurality of types of small role symbols, and the lottery means is related to the establishment of one or more flags among the plurality of flags. Make a lottery. Corresponding to the plurality of rotation display bodies, there is also provided stop operation means capable of individually stopping each of the plurality of rotation display bodies in the rotation display state by an external operation. Then, stop control of the rotation display body is performed based on the flag in the winning establishment state and the timing when the external operation is performed, and according to the combination of symbols straddling the plurality of rotation display bodies that are stopped and displayed, The resulting prize can be awarded by a prize granting means. It should be noted that the stop control of the plurality of rotating display bodies is based on any one of the plurality of slip tables so that the symbol combination corresponding to the flag in the winning state is displayed (displayed on the active line). This is performed by the stop control means. The slip table is stored in the table storage means.

  And the symbol combination straddling three or more rotation display bodies is a combination of any one of the award symbol combinations among a plurality of types of award symbol combinations corresponding to a special role flag (hereinafter referred to as “special flag”). If the stop control is performed, the grand prize period is generated by the grand prize period generating means. The grand prize period is a period in which a game to which a prize can be awarded is performed over a plurality of games. When this grand prize period occurs, a large number of prizes are awarded to the player. In the above gaming machine, as a game medium, for example, a medal (a medal is an example and may be a pachinko ball) is used in a game, and a normal state in which no grand prize period has occurred, the game machine progresses. When the game medium gradually decreases (hereinafter, the normal state is referred to as a “gradual decrease game state”) and the grand prize period occurs, a medal as a game medium is given to the player as the prize during the grand prize period. Will frequently occur, so the game media will gradually increase.

  By the way, a player who plays a game on this type of gaming machine plays a game with the goal of showing a combination of grand prize symbols as a premise that the grand prize period will occur. If the special flag is not established, there is no indication. However, in the lottery by the lottery means, the game is generally started by operating the start lever after the game medium is inserted. That is, when the start lever is operated, it is already determined whether or not a combination of grand prize symbols will be displayed in the game, and there is no expectation for the player in a game where the special flag is not won. You will have to play a meaningless game. Furthermore, since the probability that a special flag is won in a lottery by lottery means is generally kept low, such meaningless games may continue indefinitely. It will be a hard work for the person.

  Therefore, in the above gaming machine, even if the game medium gradually decreases as the game progresses, the special flag can always be in the winning state, so that the grand prize period can always occur. In the game, there is now a means to trigger the game to advance the game. That is, since the player always plays the game while there is a possibility that the grand prize period may occur, it is suppressed that the player has to play a meaningless game endlessly. “Always allow the special flag to be in the winning state” means that the special flag is in the winning state in most games in the gradually decreasing game state. For example, a unit quantity of games When a medium (for example, 50 medals) is lent, the winning probability of the special flag is set so that the special flag is won within the number of games that can be executed with the unit number of game media. This is the case.

  However, even if the special flag is won, if the combination of the grand prize symbols is easily expressed, the grand prize period will occur frequently, which is not realistic. Therefore, in the above gaming machine, various measures are taken in order to avoid frequent occurrence of the grand prize period in the gradually decreasing game state. Specifically, first, a lottery is performed by the lottery means so that the special flag and the small role flag are overlapped and the winning state is likely to be established. In addition, when the special flag and the small role flag are overlapped and the winning state is established, the stop control of the plurality of rotation display bodies by the stop control means is a small role symbol corresponding to the small role flag rather than the combination of the grand prize symbols. (For example, a combination of bell symbols) is preferentially shown. In other words, even if the stop control is performed at a timing at which both the combination of the small role symbols and the combination of the grand prize symbols can be expressed, the stop control of the rotary display body is performed so that only the combination of the small role symbols is expressed. Is called.

  And in the gradual reduction game state, the combination of the small role symbol combination and the grand prize period non-occurrence game in which the combination of the small role symbol is always shown so that the grand prize period does not occur and the small role flag is in the winning state. Only when an external operation is performed at a timing at which the representation is avoided, a combination of specific grand prize symbols among a plurality of types of grand prize symbols is represented, and a game that can cause a grand prize period can occur, Is configured to run.

  By the way, there have been game machines such as stock machines and AT machines in the past, but such game machines can be awarded a large amount of game media in a short time, so there is not only a risk for pachinko halls, It was unfavorable because he would give greed to others. In this regard, according to the above gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a reduction in gambling while avoiding that a large amount of game media is awarded as a prize in a short time (the occurrence of a grand prize period frequently occurs in a short time). Can do. In other words, in most games in the gradual decrease game state, the special flag is set to the winning establishment state, and in the gradual decrease game state, the grand prize period non-occurrence game and the grand prize period possible game can be executed. While avoiding frequent occurrence of periods, it is possible for a player to play a game with the expectation that a combination of grand prize symbols will always be expressed.

  Note that the grand prize period non-occurrence game and the grand prize period possible game are executed, for example, by configuring them as follows. First, a plurality of grand prize symbols and a plurality of types (for example, three types) of small role symbols are attached to the respective rotary display bodies at positions where the rotary display bodies are displayed at any timing. Yes. In addition, a small role flag is associated with each combination of these plural types of small role symbols (for example, 27 combinations if there are three small role symbols). In other words, when all the flags corresponding to the combination of multiple types of small role symbols are won, the rotation display body is controlled to stop at any timing regardless of whether or not the special flag is won. Even so, a combination of small symbols is shown.

  If a special flag is won and only a part (for example, one) of all the flags corresponding to the combination of multiple types of small role symbols is not won, Only when the rotation display body stop control is performed at the timing at which the display of the combination of the small role symbols corresponding to the established flag is avoided, the combination of the grand prize symbols is displayed in the slip table. The rotation display body is controlled to stop based on a grand prize winning table which is one of the above. However, if only some flags among all the small role flags corresponding to combinations of multiple types of small role symbols are not won, the combination of small role symbols corresponding to the winning flag is displayed. Even if the rotation display body stop control is performed at the timing at which is avoided, the combination of the grand prize symbols is not shown if the special flag is not established.

  Under these circumstances, a game in which a special flag and all the flags corresponding to combinations of multiple types of small roles are duplicated and won is a game that is not a grand prize period (a special flag is won) Is not required). On the other hand, the special flag and all the small role symbols except for some small role symbols among all the flags corresponding to combinations of multiple types of small role symbols are won. The game that can occur during the grand prize period.

  In the grand prize period-probable game, both the grand prize symbol and the small role symbol are shown based on the external operation of the first rotational display body among all the rotational display bodies in the rotational display state. However, when the displayed grand prize symbol is not a specific grand prize symbol, stop control of the other rotary display bodies in the rotational display state is performed as follows. The specific grand prize symbol is a grand prize symbol that constitutes a combination of grand prize symbols that can be expressed in the grand prize period occurrence game.

  That is, when at least the first rotation display body among all the rotation display bodies is in the stop display state and two or more rotation display bodies are in the rotation display state, of the two or more rotation display bodies Even if an external operation is performed on the second rotation display body, which is one of the rotation display bodies, at a timing at which both the grand prize symbol and the small role symbol can be displayed, the game is a game that can occur during the grand prize period. Stop control is performed to keep secret.

  Specifically, only when there is always a possibility that the combination of the small role symbols will be expressed among the combination of the grand prize symbols and the combination of the small role symbols when all the rotating display bodies are in the stop display state. On the other hand (that is, only the small role symbol is tempered), the second rotation display body is controlled to be stopped by the game mode secret means based on the secret table that is one of the slide tables. As a result, when the first rotation display body is stopped, the first rotation display body is stopped if a specific grand prize symbol is not shown in spite of the grand prize period possible game. By eliminating the possibility that the combination of award symbols will be revealed at the time, it is possible to avoid giving the player an unnecessary sense of expectation and, in turn, reducing the disappointment that can be given to the player. That is, if an external operation is not performed at the timing when a specific grand prize symbol is displayed in spite of being a game that can occur during the grand prize period, it is confidential that the game was a game that can occur during the grand prize period. Therefore, the discouragement that can be given to the player can be reduced.

  According to the present invention, since the expectation for displaying the combination of bonus symbols is maintained, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is a door-shaped front member omitted. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing the state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show a temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view in which the cover of the wiring relay member is omitted, and FIGS. 16-1 and 16-2 are views of the connector holder. 17 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 17 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 18 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 19 and 20 are cross-sectional views of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, FIG. Is a partial perspective view of the symbol variation display device showing another form of the handle, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the main part showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer body side, and FIG. 23 is a wiring window and the symbol variation display device. FIG. 24 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 25 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted, and FIG. Exploded perspective view, FIG. 27 is a slot machine FIG. 28 is a partially sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing the power supply device viewed from below, and FIG. 30 shows another embodiment. FIG. 31 is a schematic sectional view of an illuminating device showing another embodiment, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing the transparent plate and the light emitting unit in an exploded manner. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door-shaped front member showing the transparent plate, FIG. 34 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 32A-A of the door-shaped front member equipped with the transparent plate, and FIG. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member, and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. 39 is a perspective view seen from the back side showing the upper half of the door-shaped front member, and FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing an example of the metal fitting, and FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG.

  The slot machine 1 of the present invention includes a box-shaped outer main body 100 having an open front surface, a door-shaped front member 200 attached to the front surface of the outer main body 100 so as to be rotatable in a laterally open door shape with a rotation shaft 100a, A symbol variation display device 300 (symbol display means) in which a symbol is rotated and displayed by a plurality of symbols being changed by the driving means, and a case member that is detachable from the outer body 100 and has an opening 401 on the front surface. 400 and an image display 500 that displays an arbitrary image.

[Outside body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer body 100 has side plates 102 and 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102 and 102. It has a letter-shaped frame shape and is formed in a box shape in which only the front surface is opened by fixing a back plate 104 to the back of the frame. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined in a backward inclined state, and thus the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward inclined inclination. In addition, a plurality of (in the embodiment, in the embodiment) the top plate 103 is located in an area facing the upper pier 600 (see imaginary line in FIG. 24) of the gaming machine installation island in a state of being installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). 4) through-holes 132 are formed.

[Outer body-divider]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf-like partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a protruding portion 106 at the center as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, and vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends are attached to the outer body 100. The side plate 102 is fixed to the inner surface of the side plate 102, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 is formed with a cylindrical projection (not shown) by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and positioned. In addition, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in the innermost part on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, the medal payout device 110 that discharges medals as game media to the medal tray 201 at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200 and the medal payout device 110. A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[Outer body-partition plate-lower space-medal dispensing device]
The medal payout device 110 has a medal storage hopper 110b attached to an apparatus main body 110a having a built-in driving means, and a medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the apparatus main body 110a. A certain medal is sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. The hopper 110b is provided with an overflow rod 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the protruding end of the overflow rod 110d. The medal release mechanism of the medal payout device 110 may employ any currently known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply]
As shown in FIGS. 25 to 29, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion in which three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 and the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. Yes. The power supply device 112 is for supplying electricity to the electrical components such as the medal payout device 110 and is a component that easily generates heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 radiates heat to the attachment portion of the power supply device 112. A mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find an unauthorized work on the power supply board 112s (see FIG. 29) of the power supply device 112 and the like.

  The device case 112a includes an upper plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and an interior of the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 29) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a that faces the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is not covered and is in an open state. It is blocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is provided below the guard portion 102b. It is a specification that sneaks one side. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is blocked by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 30 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly protruded toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard portion 102b is formed. It fits into the groove.

  Thus, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is covered with the side plate 102 during use, the device case 112a is moved into the device case 112a. The power supply board 112s and the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach the cover to the open surface after the power supply board 112s and the like are assembled in the device case 112a.

  The upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a are formed with a large number of air holes 112g, 112g. . The device case 112a is lifted in a raised manner by legs 112h, 112h... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Accordingly, low-rise and relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiating port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air at the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If a reverse L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 29) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a are formed. Even if there is a deviation in the height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes an attachment piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 112 m and the heat radiating port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 are fixed to the outer main body 100.

  That is, the contour of the heat radiating port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiating port 104a. The protrusion 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is in a position inscribed in the heat radiating port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the radiating port 104a to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. It consists of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protrusion 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiating port 104a in order to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, the power supply device 112 is pushed along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer body 100, and the protrusion 112m is inserted into the heat radiating port 104a. Fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted by the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted with respect to directions other than the direction of pulling forward by a simple operation of only fitting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of screw through holes 112p are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and are fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q in at least one of the through holes 112p. Thus, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction of pulling forward, the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a and the power cord is pulled out from the bulging portion. However, at this position, there is a high risk that the power cord is bundled with the ground. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and a power cord must be taken out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for the case. Therefore, the slot machine 1 is moved on the manufacturing line or between lines. When moving the power cord, the power cord may slip on the ground or may get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment expands the cord outlet 104b from the upper side toward the upper side, and draws the power cord from there. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, since the power supply device 112 is set at the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and only one wood screw 112q is screwed in, the mounting is completed. Great labor saving in installation work. Further, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, and therefore, particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to see and can be fixed securely. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw with respect to a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112. In particular, a screw fixed to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize and may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104 a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104 a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra process or cost hardly occurs. On the contrary, the cooling efficiency is improved because the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally formed, so that it costs little. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case. Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the stepped portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as a countermeasure against heat generation of the power supply device 112 can be implemented with almost no cost.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as the core of the wiring means described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. The back plate 104 is further provided with a vent hole 133 for heat dissipation above the wiring relay member 113.

[Door type front member]
3 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side on the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided in the approximate center on the front side. The operation unit 202 includes a medal insertion slot 203, a 1-bet button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main control board 409, which will be described later, Similarly, a MAX bet button 206 for instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, 3) that can be used in one game, and a medal return button for returning a medal packed in a medal selector 207 to be described later to the medal tray 201. 208, a stored medal settlement button 209 for inputting a medal storage release command (release command by settlement) stored as data in the memory of the main control board 409, and a start lever for operating the symbol variation display device 300 210 and each reel 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are won. Player his three capable of stopping at the selected timing by making the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c (intention intervening stop operation means), and the like as. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

  In addition, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, and a medal basket 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return basket 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a well-known one that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown), and when the game state is waiting for the player to insert a medal, the flow path is set to the medal tub 212 side. In addition, in a gaming state in which medals are refused to be inserted, such as medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return basket 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position where the door-shaped front member 200 covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the tip thereof faces the hopper 110 b of the medal payout device 110. The medal that flows through the medal bowl 212 through the hop-off reaches the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return basket 213 is connected to the front-side medal tray 201, and the medal that flows from the insertion slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return basket 213 returns to the medal tray 201.

[Door-shaped front member-see-through window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and the upper half of the door-shaped front member 200 is a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300 can be seen side by side, and the image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The regions of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided vertically. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 is switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[Door-shaped front member-transparent window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a uses a transparent synthetic resin (for example, methacrylic resin containing rubber excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used. ) Is an upside-down trapezoidal shape, and the edge member 214b bulges to the front side of the three sides (left and right sides and upper side) excluding the bottom, with the side facing the player as the front. 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a mold for resin molding. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed on the periphery of the flat plate-like transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, bending and distortion hardly occur.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the edge member 214b is a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not a solid, but a shell-like structure with a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, for example, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or characters on the surface are incorporated in the internal space as necessary. In FIG. 33, the light emitting unit 217 is depicted as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part. The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to that shown in the figure, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on any one side at a minimum.

  32 and 33, reference numeral 218 denotes a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a. The screw passes through the through hole 214c (see the enlarged view of FIG. 32) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 33 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. The fixing member 218 functions as a corner decoration on the appearance, and on the through holes 200a and 214d (see the enlarged view of FIG. 32) provided in the corner portions on the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby serving as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  32 to 34, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitter 217a. As shown in FIG. 34, the reflection member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 positioned on the left and right is set at an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitter 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitter 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. In addition, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitter 217a (a combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) upward of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above-described structure can be turned on during a game, especially when a big hit is made, and can produce an effect that appeals to the surroundings of the occurrence of the big win. In this way, by performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won the big hit, and the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further increases the game. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that the jackpot is coming out.

  The transparent plate 214a according to the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the bottom of the plate-shaped front member 200 is formed on the concave groove 219 (see an enlarged view of FIG. 33) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Inserted obliquely from the front and fitted into a joiner type, in that state the transparent plate 214a is erected to bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200, and further the door-shaped front member 200 It fixes with the screw | thread 603 (refer FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 34 is a cut view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is clear from FIG. 34, if the player has a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign material to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[Door-type front member-locking device]
A lock device 215 that opens and closes using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200. When a dedicated key is inserted into the lock device 215 and turned counterclockwise, a detection signal from a batting release / error release switch 215c provided at the back of the lock device 215 is input as a reset signal to a main control board 409 described later. It has become so. On the other hand, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened from the outer body 100 by turning clockwise, an open signal from the door open detection switch 220 provided on the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 is input.

[Design variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that can be individually rotated by driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. And a device case 302 that plays a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

  The device case 302 has a deformed hexagonal column shape excluding three faces from the octagonal column that lies on its side to the front (player), and includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and a right side in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307 on the left side, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between top plate 305 and rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308. And a part of the arc of the reels 301 a, 301 b, and 301 c protrudes from the front of the device case 302.

Further, the top plate 305 of the apparatus case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed between a useable state in which the finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate 305 is depressed. To carry.
The configuration in which the changeable handle 311 is provided on the top plate 305 of the device case 302 as described above is closely related to a measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400.
That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, a reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400 to give the opening 401 of the case member 400 sufficient strength to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes an obstacle to the insertion and removal of the apparatus case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 can be changed and hung on the top plate 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Therefore, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the direction crossing the opening 401 in the opening 401 of the case member 400 only by providing the handle 311 which can be changed as described above on the top plate 305 of the apparatus case 302. Become.
Incidentally, the conventional apparatus case has a room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member because the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle.

  In addition, the handle 311 of the embodiment is configured to swing and change between the standing use state and the lying down non-use state, but the structure that can change the handle 311 between the use state and the non-use state is implemented. The form is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 21, two belt loops 314, 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314, 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather, and stoppers 315, 315 are provided at both ends. The use state in which the finger can be hooked, such as a structure in which the band-shaped handle 311 is inserted and the center is pulled up to change to the use state in which the finger can be hooked from the uncovered non-use state in FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to the unused state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-like lower handle 316 protrudes from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the device case 302 is pushed in by grasping the lower handle 316. By pulling, it is easy to put in and out the case member 400.

[Case material]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404 and 404 erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. The rear plate 405 is erected on the rear edge of the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 covers the upper surface of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plate 404, 404 and the inner surface of the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are made of metal reinforcement. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 across the opening 401 is stretched between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the image display body 500. An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is allocated as a wiring work space 408, and a main control board 409 as a main control board is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408, Further, a control board other than the main control board 409 (for example, a peripheral control board 750 described later) is also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  The top plate 406 of the case member 400 is formed with skylight portions 443 and 443 as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, each of which has an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132. It exists in the area | region containing an intersection, and is opened sufficiently widely than this through-hole 132,132 .... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight portion 443 is close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, since the through hole 132 can be found by searching with the periphery of the skylight portion 443 as a reference, the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator does not look into the skylight portion 443.

  As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 protrude from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. The boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104 are fitted and positioned. 2 and 5, the bosses 410 and 410 are provided in the vicinity of a wiring window 411, which will be described later. Accordingly, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end on the rear plate 405 side of the recessed step portion 412, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The concave step 412 can be smoothly fitted. As described above, the case member 400 is guided straight into the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid on the plate 105 or press-molded integrally. On the other hand, a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 20, a rail member 116 having a convex shape is laid on the partition plate 105 or integrally formed with press, and on the other hand, flanges 415, 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of the wheel 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105 and is stopped by the swing lever-shaped stoppers 117, 117, 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 17, and 22. Yes. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and the two attachments 118, 118 suspended from the top plate 103, as shown by the solid line in FIG. The operation posture engaged with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operation posture not engaged with the case member 400 as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is key-shaped as shown in FIG. 18 and is engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to. Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing a locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The operation posture and the non-operation posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400 while the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position.

  In addition, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating to the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100 is opened on the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 4, 5, and 23, and below the main control board 409. A laterally empty space 417 located on the upper swash plate 309 (or a laterally triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main control board 409). It functions as an opening connecting the back plate 104 and the back plate 104.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf-like temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially intermediate position of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419 are formed on the outside of the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, which are wiring passages that pass through the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 has the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c as a lower limit, that is, the height at which the lower side is placed within the range. In other words, it is an arrangement.

[Image display]
The image display 500 includes, for example, at least a liquid crystal display (in addition, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like) and a peripheral control board 750 (described later) that performs display control of the liquid crystal display. It is unitized. In the image display body 500, a hinge bracket 420 is attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. It is supported.

[Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. FIG. In addition, since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge bracket 420 includes a fixing member 420a that is attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a rotating member 420b that is attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see a broken line region 500s in FIG. 35), and the rotating member 420b. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the fixing member 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is connected to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e with a pin P1, and the short link is connected to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is formed on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f with a pin P3, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. In addition, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4. Thus, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-bar rotating chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double lever mechanism is formed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 36A to 36C, both the lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory centering on the rotation shaft 100a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h that overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is expanded in a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), And pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis and inserted into a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the lever mechanism and locking the image display body. It is for fixing 500 to an open position.

[Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 is locked to the reinforcing member 407 on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 (on the right side in FIG. 11). A piece 421 is pivotally attached. When the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 11, the tip of the lock piece 421 is engaged with a receiving portion 508 projecting from the back side of the image display body 500. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the lock piece 421 is rotatable about the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while in the state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image is displayed. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable. By doing so, if the image display body 500 is opened immediately after opening the door-shaped front member 200, the interior of the wiring work space 408 can be checked.

[Image display body-connector]
In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are connected by an appropriate connector 700 as means for efficiently checking the wiring work space 408 in the back of the image display body 500. The image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. In this case, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment are configured such that the pivotal trajectory of the image display body 500 causes the rotation shaft 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 to rotate by the lever mechanism of the hinge bracket 420. Although it is designed to approximate a rotation trajectory that is the center of rotation, there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 39, the coupling tool 700 of the embodiment forms a fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500 and is slidable inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is housed, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) so as to be rotatable by a stop shaft 703. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 38, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it is an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connector 700 enters and exits the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative shift in movement.

  The retaining shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, and 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the locking device 215 so as to be movable up and down, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. Has been. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved up against the urging force of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving up and floating the lower end. In FIG. 39, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700. The rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. It is for holding in the inside and engages with the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent blind movement of the rod 702. On the side of the rod 702, a knob 706 protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, and the stopper 704 is unlocked by picking the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is like that. In FIG. 39, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion that projects from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the free end side. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 that traverses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide part 402 a inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached to the image display body 500. Yes.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation trajectory between the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described telescopic rod-type connector 700 but also a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped while being opened at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, thereby impairing smoothness. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to constantly urge it in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 closes by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge bracket 420, which is one element for rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the double lever mechanism as described above, but is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. A simple one that rotates the image display 500 may be used.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above, in which the image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. Handling can also be selected. In this case, the image display body 500 can block important components (for example, the main control board 409) in the wiring work space 408, which is effective in improving crime prevention performance.

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500. It can be grasped. A handle opening 422 is formed at the front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443 and 443). The reinforcing member 407 can be gripped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be properly used for the handle 422 and the gap 10 in accordance with the place and posture of handling. For example, when the case member 400 is transported before being incorporated into the outer main body 100, it is better to carry it in a bowl shape using the handle port 422. On the other hand, the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100 is shown in FIG. As described above, the grip port 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 so that a finger does not enter, so that the case member 400 is pulled out by placing the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 protrudes from the front center of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer body 100 is pushed or pulled by holding the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws, and therefore, the lower handle 316 projects from the front surface of the floor plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

[Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire region above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400. Also, on the lower side of the image display body 500, a frame member 501 that hangs in a frame shape surrounds a region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, a front region of the symbol variation display device 300. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are bordered by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, on which an appropriate pattern is drawn.

[Image display body-frame member-illumination apparatus]
An illumination device 502 is provided on the upper and lower sides of the frame member 501, and the design of the symbol variation display device 300 is illuminated brightly by the illumination device 502. Since the frame member 501 is suspended below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, it is possible to bring the light source closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 has a feature that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low amount of light compared to the conventional lighting device.

  As illustrated in FIG. 4, the illumination device 502 illustrated as an embodiment has a strip-like substrate that is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing (in the width direction of the slot machine 1 and in the same direction as the rotation axis of the reel 301 a...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in a row 503, and the lower lighting device 502 includes an LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed with, for example, a milky white translucent cover plate 505. On the other hand, the upper illuminating device 502 is formed by disposing the LED 504 downward in a translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section upward, for example, milky white.

  Note that the upper lighting device 502 is installed obliquely downward with the lighting direction from directly below to the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation region of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side. Also, if a rod-like light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-like or concave reflecting member that wraps the light source, and direct light and What is necessary is just to set so that the centerline of the main irradiation area directed by the sum total of reflected light may strike the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. As described above, when the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, there is almost no influence.

  According to experiments, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected and difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason for this is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 is reflected by the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and diffused to the whole, or the reel 301a, It is presumed that the wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic action.

  The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can also be adopted for the lower illumination device 502, and of course, it can also be adopted only for the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. In FIG. 31, the upper illumination device 502 in FIG. 4 is arranged on the lower side, and the lower illumination device 502 is arranged on the upper side. Therefore, “upper” in the description of the illumination device 502 is “lower”. And read “below” as “upper”.

  When the LED is used as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) since it is driven at a low voltage, the safety is higher than that of a conventional cold cathode tube driven at a high voltage of about 200V. ) Longer life than a cold cathode tube, (c) Stronger than a cold cathode tube that is a glass tube, (d) Multi-color emission is possible, so the range of production can be expanded, (e) Combined with an inverter Therefore, there is a merit that it is lighter than the cold-cathode tube used, and therefore the burden on the hinge fitting 420 that supports the image display body 500 is small.

[Wiring means]
For example, the bet buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter simply referred to as “generic names” in the operation unit 202 of the medal payout device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer main body 100. And the main control board 409, etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as “case member-side electrical component” as a general term for electrical components on the case member side). Electrically connected. The slot machine 1 according to the embodiment includes a game unit (a case member 400 provided detachably with respect to the inside of the outer main body 100) and a symbol variation display device 300 and an image display body 500 for displaying an arbitrary image. In this embodiment, as shown in the exploded perspective view of Fig. 11, the symbol variation display device 300, the case member 400, and the image display body 500) are detachably attached to the outer main body 100. Therefore, a rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electrical component and the case member side electrical component when the gaming unit (case member 400) is replaced.

[Wiring means-Wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. Yes. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the game unit side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts, and the back relay 104 of the outer main body 100 is used. A mounting plate 120 that is screwed to the cover plate, a cover body 121 that covers the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of connector boards (two in the embodiment, large and small) that are housed between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120. Hereinafter, it may also be referred to as a “connector connection terminal board”.) That is, it comprises a main relay board 122 and a peripheral relay board 123.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the main relay board 122, which is the larger connector board located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15, is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120. A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the control board 409 is provided. In the embodiment, the harness 424 and the connector 425 at the tip connected to the main control board 409 (see FIGS. 11 and 16-1) are game control among the game unit side wirings described in claim 1 as well. It corresponds to a main control system wiring connected to the board and a main control system wiring connection connector attached to the tip of the wiring. Further, the connector 124 of the main relay board 122 corresponds to a main relay connector in which main body side wirings including wiring from the power supply device 112 described in claim 1 are assembled.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board (peripheral relay board) 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached to the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121 in a non-fixed playable state. Therefore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 15, it can move in the vertical direction and can also move in the horizontal direction. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with a connector 427 at the tip of a harness 426 connected to a peripheral control board 750 described later. In the embodiment, the harness 426 connected to the peripheral control board 750 and the connector 427 at the tip thereof are peripheral control system wirings connected to the peripheral control board among the gaming unit side wirings described in claim 1. It corresponds to a connector for connecting peripheral control system wirings attached to the front end thereof. Further, the connector 125 of the peripheral relay board 123 is separate from the main body side wirings described in claim 1 (corresponding to a harness indicated by reference numeral 910 in FIG. 14), and is a door-shaped front member. It corresponds to a peripheral relay connector assembled by including wirings from the door-side decorative light emitters (corresponding to a left light emitter 217A, a right light emitter 217B, and an upper light emitter 217C described later) disposed in 200. Further, in the present invention, the game unit side wirings are divided into main control system wirings 424 connected to the game control board and peripheral control system wirings 426 connected to the peripheral control board (see FIG. 16-1). The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding in a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 projecting forward.

The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or is bundled with a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 are distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 as shown by a one-dot chain line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed substantially vertically near the corners of the side plates 102 and 102 and the back plate 104, many of which are The wiring board 109 is connected to the electrical component on the main body side through the wiring opening 109 provided in the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electrical component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) The rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is self-exposed between a horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.
(B) A wiring relay member 113 is installed on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to relay the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the game unit side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts.
(C) A vertical wiring path through which wiring passes along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 is formed.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and is connected to the main body side electrical component through the wiring path therefrom.

  In the gaming machine having the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 are connected. Since the wiring path provided along the corner (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)) is bypassed, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is larger than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wirings 119 pass through the back of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c almost down the center of the back plate 104. Can be bigger. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force at the time of rotation.

[Wiring means-connectors 425, 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include a connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main control board 409 of the case member 400 and a peripheral control board 750 described later. The connectors 427 at the ends of the connected harnesses 426 are connected to each other. The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. 16A (the connectors 425 and 427 are collectively supported by one connector holder 428). The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 that has a through hole 430 at a substantially central portion and protrudes on both sides of the holder main body 429, and It consists of a well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) mounted in the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8A, the wiring relay member 113 An attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Therefore, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and further fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 cannot be disconnected.

[Wiring Relay Board-Connector 425, 427-Temporary Stop Shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400.

  The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf-like member directed from the inside of the case member 400 toward the wiring window 411 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and shown in FIG. In this way, a substantially horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, a bench side plate 434 erected at both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. Between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other two on the upper and lower sides, there is an interval at which the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a force in the X direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the bent state. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent into a key shape. By doing so, the connector holder 428 can be removed just like pressing the button as indicated by arrow Y. It can be done easily.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by being fitted between 435. Of course, even if it is temporarily fixed, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, the connectors 425 and 427 at the ends of the harnesses 424 and 426 (see FIG. 13) hit the components in the case member 400 during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or incorporating the case member 400 into the outer main body 100. There is no danger of damaging the parts themselves, of course.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8B → FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after the case member 400 is fixed to the outer main body 100, one bench side plate 434 is bent outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 thereof contacts the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. 124 and 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in that state, and the attachment piece 431 is locked to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6, if the guide rail 440 for guide is provided on the bench portion 433, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 inward, so that workability is improved. improves. The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a supporting base and is not in contact with the case member because it is separated from the case member. An unreasonable load is not added even if 100 and the game unit move relatively.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and the power supply device and other body side electrical components are provided;
(B) a gaming unit provided with a symbol variation display device for changing a plurality of symbols on a case member detachably attached to the outer main body, and other case member side electrical components;
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay the main body side wiring connected to the main body side electric component and the game unit side wiring connected to the case member side electric component;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the gaming unit side wiring;
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided in the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member;
(H) The connector holder is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing member before the gaming unit is attached to the outer body, and the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means while the gaming unit is attached to the outer body. (I) A gaming machine, wherein the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the above gaming machine, the mounting of the gaming unit to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, a connector is directly attached to the gaming unit, A method of automatically connecting the connectors by an operation of pushing the unit into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, in this method, when a gaming unit having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a heavy burden is applied to the connector coupling portion, so there is a concern about reliability, and there is a problem that costs are required for countermeasures. .

  The gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the game unit is physically independent from the door-type front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the gaming unit side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may become unstable. There is a problem that requires a new security structure for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the game unit is physically independent from the door-type front member 200. After the holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is combined with a component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer main body 100 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and gaming. In addition, only the gaming unit is a replacement target when the model is changed, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not a replacement target.

[Combination of connectors 425 and 427 and connectors 124 and 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113.
However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes a difficult problem. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be coupled together. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for enhancing flexibility at the time of connection without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 as the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively attached, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction that is non-fixedly placed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “orthogonal” is not strictly 90 degrees). , Meaning that it is about 90 degrees on social belief)). In such a configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is corrected. Since it moves to correct, connector 427 and connector 125 can also be coupled. Thus, a board-fixed and inexpensive DIN standard connector can be sufficiently used.

  The above gaming machines are designed so that the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation due to manufacturing error etc. in the relative position between other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect the connectors which are not the joint aim. Accordingly, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. In addition, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, DIN standard soldered to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low. In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body through the wiring relay member, and by extension, the wiring relay member, by fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the gaming unit are only connected via a flexible harness, and even if the gaming unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. . For this reason, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the gaming unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the gaming unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is movable and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are used as a reference for coupling is compared to the opposite configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily matched.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 9, the chamfered portion C ( If a straight chamfering or a curved chamfering is possible), the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C makes the connectors more connectable.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, it is also possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to be movable. In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receiving cylinder 429a with a female thread is provided on the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having free holes 427a on both sides of the connector 427 are formed, and the receiving cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The loose hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving tube 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be fixed to the mounting plate 120 integrally. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 12, the back of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are opened near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 to the main control board 409 and the like. In FIG. A cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel main relay board 312 provided on the (non-hinge side surface of the door-shaped front member 200) is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is pulled out. In this manner, the cable is placed in the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main control board 409 and the like. The cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not fall off from the cable groove 437.

  Thus, the main control board 409 and the reel main relay board 312 are both case member-side electrical components in the case member 400, and it is not necessary to pull out the cable 313 outside the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is intentionally provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel main relay board 312 is not limited to the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for inserting and removing connectors in a limited space. The side corresponding to the hinge side is preferred. Conversely, if the reel main relay board 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) that is fully opened and the reel main relay board 312. This is because a large working space necessary for inserting and removing the connector cannot be secured because the two face each other at close positions. However, on the other hand, when the connecting portion of the boards (main control board 409, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel main relay board 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400, The cable 313 looks like it crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. Further, the wiring work is better when the apparatus case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel main relay board 312 is determined by the wiring charge. But there is room to say. Accordingly, the cable 313 is slackened with the apparatus case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the cable 313 is slackened depending on the amount of pull-out. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the apparatus case 302 and the corner portion at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. The loose part of can be escaped.

Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, it is between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space.
The wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 need not be limited to the cable 313 of the reel main relay board 312, and can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, the code | symbol 441 is a function separation relay terminal board.

The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a finished product state in which the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the amusement hall. At this time, as shown in the imaginary line in FIG. 24, the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the game machine installation island are made of wood screws or the like. When stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight 443, The fixing member 601 is tightened over the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper beam 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper beam 600 can be selected. Further, when the entire gaming machine is replaced, if the through-hole 132 to be used is changed, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect that the hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper rail 600 (so-called fool hole formation).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 24, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and the heat generated from the image display body 500 and the like is a cooling fan (not shown) of the image display body 500. Then, it passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S to the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S over a wide range. It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[Replacing gaming units]
When changing the game content or changing the game model, the members and electrical parts disposed on the outer main body 100 and the door front member 200 are left and used as they are, and only the game unit is connected to the main body side. It is removed from (the outer main body 100 and the door front member 200), and a new game unit is housed and fixed inside the opening 109 of the outer main body 100. Hereinafter, a specific work procedure for exchanging gaming units will be described.

[Removing the gaming unit from the outer body 100]
When a key is inserted into the locking device 215 on one side of the free end of the door-shaped front member 200 shown in FIG. 3 and turned clockwise, the lock is released and the door-shaped front member 200 is released from the outer body 100. be able to. When the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled forward with respect to the outer main body 100, the door-shaped front member 200 rotates in a direction to open the interior with respect to the outer main body 100 around the rotation shaft 100a (see FIGS. 1 and 38). Move. At this time, in the image display body 500, the lower end portion of the retaining shaft 703 supported by the support piece 215 b of the door-shaped front member 200 is located in the fixed sheath member 701 of the image display body 500 by the connector 700 (see FIG. 39). As a result, the image display body 500 rotates integrally with the door-shaped front member 200 around the hinge fitting 420 (see FIG. 38). As a result, the opening 401 of the case member 400 is exposed.

  Next, a hand is put in the opening 401 of the case member 400, and the connector holder 428 (see FIG. 16A) in the wiring work space 408 at the back is removed from the wiring relay member 113. As shown in FIG. 5, the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinders 128 and 128 of the wiring relay member 113 by left and right button-type panel fasteners 432 and 432. When the left and right button-shaped panel fasteners 432 and 432 are picked and pulled about 5 mm in the front direction, the connection between the left and right button-shaped panel fasteners 432 and 432 and the support cylinders 128 and 128 is released. Then, by supporting the left and right attachment pieces 431 and 431 of the connector holder 428 by hand and pulling it forward, the connector connection between the connector 124 of the wiring relay member 113 and the connector 425 of the connector holder 428 is released, and the wiring When the connector connection between the connector 125 of the relay member 113 and the connector 427 of the connector holder 428 is released, both the connectors 425 and 427 can be removed. The connector holder 428 removed from the wiring relay member 113 is arranged on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418 (see FIG. 6). Thereby, the connector holder 428 does not move during transportation of the gaming unit.

  Next, the upper left and right stoppers 117 shown in FIG. 22 are manually turned from the inside of the game unit and rotated to a position where they do not engage with the locking holes 442 of the case member 400 (toward the front of the case member 400). Removal of movement restrictions). Further, the lower stopper 117 (see FIGS. 1 and 17) is turned to the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 17 to defeat it (removal of the forward restriction of the case member 400).

  Next, the display shaft 703 of the connector 700 shown in FIG. 39 is lifted upward against the urging force of the spring 703a, so that the engagement between the stop shaft 703 and the rod is released and the image display body is released. 500 is rotated in a direction to close the opening 401 of the case member 400 around the hinge fitting 420 (see FIG. 38). Then, the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed with the image display body 500, and the lock piece 421 shown in FIG. 11 is rotated clockwise so that the tip thereof protrudes from the back side of the image display body 500. In this state, the image display body 500 is locked in a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. As a result, the gaming unit is only placed on the partition plate 105 (see FIG. 1) of the outer main body 100.

  Next, by placing a hand on the lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 1 and 11) below the case member 400 below the symbol variation display device 300 and pulling the game unit together with the case member 400, the game unit is placed together with the outer body 100. Pull it out toward you. Then, the user pulls out the gaming unit at once by placing a hand on the handle opening 422 provided on the upper surface of the case member 400. The gaming unit is removed from the outer main body 100 as described above. Note that the grip port 422 is positioned almost directly above the center of gravity of the game unit, so that it can be held stably. The procedure for storing and fixing a new game unit inside the opening 109 of the outer main body 100 is reversed.

[Electrical system deployed in slot machines]
Next, an electrical system provided in the slot machine 1 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the control configuration of the slot machine 1 is composed of a main control board 409 and a peripheral control board 750 arranged on the game unit side, and various controls are shared. 42 shows a main control board 409 and a main body side (outer main body 100) arranged on the game unit side (consisting of the symbol variation display device 300 + the case member 400 + the image display body 500 as shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 11). It is a block diagram of the main relay board | substrate 122 arrange | positioned at the wiring relay member 113) arrange | positioned at the back board 104 of this. FIG. 45 is a front view of the main relay board 122 and the peripheral relay board 123 accommodated in the wiring relay member 113.

[Main relay board 122]
As shown in FIG. 45, the main relay board 122 includes a connector CN1 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN1 of the main relay board 122) for connection with the power supply board 112s and a connector 425 with a harness connected to the main control board 409 ( A connector 124 (see FIGS. 14 and 15; hereinafter referred to as a connector CN2 of the main relay board 122) connected to the connector 124 (see FIG. 16-1) and a main door relay board disposed on the back surface of a door-shaped front member 200 described later. In order to output game information of the slot machine 1 to a connector CN3 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN3 of the main relay board 122) connected to the 850 and a hall computer (not shown) installed in the game hall (hall). Connector CN4 (hereinafter referred to as connector CN4 of main relay board 122) connected to external relay terminal board 131 (see FIG. 1) that relays to When the connector is connected to the token payout unit 110 CN5
(Hereinafter referred to as connector CN5 of main relay board 122) and connector CN6 (hereinafter referred to as connector CN6 of main relay board 122) connected to medal auxiliary storage switch 111a provided inside auxiliary storage box 111 for medals. ) And a connector CN7 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN7 of the main relay board 122) connected to the door opening detection switch 220. The main relay board 122 serves as a relay (relay input or relay output) that simply allows various signals and power supply voltages to pass through. In the following description, since there is a connector for each board, the symbol “CN” may overlap between different boards.

  The power supply board 112s in FIG. 42 generates AC backup power for the memory of the main control board 409 and various DC operating power supplies (+ 30V power supply, + 12V power supply, + 24V power supply) by using AC24V (two terminals) as an input. 122 is supplied to the connector CN1. In addition, the code | symbol FG (one terminal) is connected to the earth | ground of amusement island equipment via the power harness which is not shown in figure. The housing FG terminal (one terminal) is connected to the metal part of the gaming machine main body as a ground.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating the number of pins of connectors CN1, CN4, CN5, CN6, and CN7 of the main relay board 122 and signals transmitted by the pins. As shown in FIGS. 42 and 46, the connector CN1 (to the power supply board 112s) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 12 pins. Pins 1 to 5 of the connector CN1 are all relay inputs for the ground GND. Pin 6 is a relay input for backup power supply (-) (0V), Pins 7 and 8 are relay inputs for + 30V power supply, and Pins 9 and 10 are both relay inputs for + 12V power supply. Yes, the 11th pin is a + 24V power supply relay input, and the 12th pin is a backup power supply (+) (+ 5V) relay input.

  The connector CN4 (external relay terminal board 131) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 10 pins. Pin 1 of connector CN4 is the relay output of external signal 5, pin 2 is the relay output of external signal 4, pin 3 is the relay output of external signal 3, pin 4 is the relay output of external signal 2, pin 5 Is a relay output of the external signal 1. Further, the 6th pin of the connector CN4 is a relay output of the medal payout signal, and the 7th pin is a relay output of the medal insertion signal. Further, the 8th to 10th pins of the connector CN4 are all relay outputs of the + 24V power source.

  The connector CN5 (to the medal payout device 110) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 5 pins. Pin 1 of connector CN5 is a relay output of S + 5V (meaning sensor + 5V power supply, hereinafter referred to as sensor + 5V power supply), pin 2 is a relay input of game medal payout count switch signal, pin 3 Is the ground GND, the 4th pin is the relay output of the game medal payout drive 1, and the 5th pin is the relay output of the game medal payout drive 2.

  The connector CN6 (to the medal auxiliary storage switch 111a) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 2 pins. The first pin of the connector CN5 is a relay input of the signal of the overflow switch (medal auxiliary storage switch 111a), and the second pin is the ground GND. Further, the connector CN7 (to-door opening detection switch 220) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 2 pins. The first pin of the connector CN7 is a relay input for the signal of the door opening detection switch 220, and the second pin is a ground GND.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating the number of pins of the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122 and signals transmitted by the respective pins. As shown in FIGS. 42 and 47, the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122 is composed of 30 pins and is connected to the main door relay board 850. 42, as indicated by a “door block” surrounded by a one-dot chain line, a main door relay board 850, a medal selector 207 connected to the main door relay board 850, a stored medal settlement button 209, a MAX bet button 206, a one-bet button 205, a start lever 210, a reel stop button 211 (211a to 211c), and a batting release / error release switch 215c are disposed on the door-shaped front member 200.

  51 is a rear view of the door-shaped front member 200 of the slot machine 1. FIG. The door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the front surface of the outer main body 100 (see FIG. 1) of the slot machine so as to be rotatable in a laterally open door shape. As shown in FIG. 51, a door substrate storage case 800 that houses a main door relay substrate (not shown) and a door decoration drive substrate (not shown) is provided at the approximate center of the rear surface of the door-shaped front member 200. It is arranged.

  FIG. 52 is a perspective view of the door substrate storage case 800. As shown in FIG. 52, the door substrate storage case 800 has a door decoration drive substrate on the side of a rectangular door decoration drive substrate storage portion 801 that houses a door decoration drive substrate 860 (only the reference numeral is shown). The main door relay board storage portion 802 is formed integrally with the main door relay board 850 (only the reference numeral is shown).

  As shown in FIG. 42, the main door relay board 850 includes a medal selector 207, a stored medal settlement button 209, a MAX bet button 206, a 1 bet button 205, a start lever 210, a reel stop button 211 (a left reel stop button 211a, a middle A reel stop button 211b, a right reel stop button 211c), and a batting release / error release switch 215c are connected.

  In FIG. 52, reference numeral 803 denotes a storage case cover that covers the entire top surface of the door substrate storage case 800. A connector with a harness connected to the medal selector 207 is attached to the outer surface of the storage case cover 803 of the main door relay substrate storage portion 802. The medal selector connection connector 852 (shown in FIG. 42) for connecting the medal selector connection connector 851 (configured with 10 pins as shown in FIG. 42) and the connector with harness connected to the stored medal adjustment button 209. Connected to the MAX bet button 206, a connector for a bet button 853 (configured with 4 pins as shown in FIG. 42), and a 1 bet button 205. 1-bet button connection connector 8 for connecting the harness-attached connector 4 (configured with 2 pins as shown in FIG. 42), start lever connection connector 855 (configured with 3 pins as shown in FIG. 42) for connecting the connector with harness connected to the start lever 210, and reel stop Reel stop button connection connector 856 (configured with 8 pins as shown in FIG. 42) for connecting the connector with harness connected to the button 211 and the connector with harness connected to the batting release / error release switch 215c. Connector 857 (consisting of two pins as shown in FIG. 42) and a connector for connecting to the main body for sending each signal mainly from the main door relay board 850 to the main relay board 122 on the main body side The member 858 (composed of a 30-pin female die) is disposed in an exposed state.

  The main door relay board 850 and the main relay board 122 are connected to a connector with a harness for connecting to the main body having a connector member connected to the main body connecting board member 858 (CN1) of the main door relay board 850 at one end (conventionally). The main relay board is connected to one end of a connector with a harness for connecting to the main body to the main body connecting board member 858 (CN1) of the main door relay board 850. The other end of the connector 900 with harness for connecting to the main body (see FIG. 14) is connected to the connector CN3 (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIG. 47, the first pin of the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the + 24V power source, and the second pin is the relay output of the drive signal to the lockout solenoid of the medal selector 207. The pin is the ground GND. Pin 4 is the relay output of the + 5V power supply for the medal passage sensor of the medal selector 207, pin 5 is the relay input of the medal passage sensor (medal insertion switch 1) signal of the medal selector 207, and pin 6 is the medal selector. The relay input of the signal 207 of the medal passage sensor (medal insertion switch 2), the seventh pin is the relay input of the signal of the medal insertion lever detection switch of the medal selector 207, and the eighth pin is the ground GND.

  The ninth pin is a relay input of a switch signal of the stored medal settlement button 209 (stored medal settlement switch), and the tenth pin is a ground GND. The 11th pin is the relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, the 12th pin is the relay input of the switch signal of the MAX bet button 206 (stored medal insertion switch 2), and the 13th pin is the lighting signal of the stored medal insertion switch LED. The 14th pin is the ground GND. The 15th pin is a relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, the 16th pin is a relay input of the switch signal of the 1-bet button 205 (stored medal insertion switch 1), and the 17th pin is a ground GND. Pin 18 is the relay output of the + 5V power supply for the sensor of the lever sensor of the start lever 210 (start operation means), Pin 19 is the ground GND, Pin 20 is the relay input of the lever sensor signal of the start lever 210. is there.

  The 21st pin is a relay input of the signal of the left reel stop button 211a corresponding to the first reel, the 22nd pin is a relay input of the signal of the middle reel stop button 211b corresponding to the second reel, and the 23rd pin is This is a relay input of the signal of the right reel stop button 211c corresponding to the third reel, and the 24th pin is the ground GND. Pin 25 is the relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, pin 26 is the relay output of the stop button LED1 lighting signal, pin 27 is the relay output of the stop button LED2 lighting signal, and pin 28 is It is a relay output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED3. The 29th pin is the relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, and the 30th pin is the relay input of the signal of the reset switch (stop release / error release switch 215c).

[Connector connection between main relay board 122 and main control board 409]
As shown in FIG. 42, the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is connected to the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 (via the connection between the connector 124 of FIG. 15 and the connector 425 with the harness 424 of FIG. 16-1). Connected). The connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 and the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are composed of 64 pins.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating the number of pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 and signals transmitted by each pin, and FIG. 49 is the number of pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 and signals transmitted by each pin. FIG. Note that the pin numbers of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 in FIG. 48 and the pin numbers of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 in FIG. 49 correspond to each other.

  The first pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 5, and the first pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 5. The second pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 4, and the second pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 4. The third pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 3, and the third pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 3. The 4th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 2, and the 4th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 2. The 5th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 1, and the 5th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 1.

  The 6th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is a medal payout signal output, and the 6th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of a medal payout signal. The 7th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is a medal insertion signal output, and the 7th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of a medal insertion signal. The eighth pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is the ground GND, and the eighth pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is also the ground GND. The 9th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a game medal payout count switch signal, and the 9th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of a game medal payout / payout count switch signal. The 10th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is the ground GND, and the 10th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is also the ground GND.

  The 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 1, and the 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 1. Relay input. The 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 2, and the 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 2. Relay input.

  The 15th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is the ground GND, and the 15th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is also the ground GND. The 16th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of an overflow switch signal (switch signal of the medal auxiliary storage switch 111a), and the 16th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the overflow switch signal. is there. The 17th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a door open detection switch signal, and the 17th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the door open detection switch signal. Pins 18 to 23 of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all ground GND, and pins 18 to 23 of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are also ground GND.

  The 24th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is a drive signal output to the lockout solenoid of the medal selector 207, and the 24th pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is driven to the lockout solenoid of the medal selector 207. This is a signal relay input. The 25th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the medal insertion switch 1 signal of the medal selector 207, and the 25th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the medal insertion switch 1 signal of the medal selector 207. It is. The 26th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the medal insertion switch 2 signal of the medal selector 207, and the 26th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the medal insertion switch 2 signal of the medal selector 207. It is. The 27th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the medal insertion lever detection switch signal of the medal selector 207, and the 27th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the medal insertion lever detection switch signal of the medal selector 207. Relay output. The 28th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a stored medal settlement switch signal (stored medal settlement button 209), and the 28th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of a stored medal settlement switch signal. is there.

  The 29th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the stored medal insertion switch 1 signal (1 bet button 205), and the 29th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the stored medal insertion switch 1 signal. It is. Pin 30 of connector CN1 of main control board 409 is an input of stored medal insertion switch 2 signal (MAX bet button 206), and pin 30 of connector CN2 of main relay board 122 is a relay output of stored medal insertion switch 2 signal. It is. The 31st pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a lever sensor signal of the start lever 210, and the 31st pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the lever sensor signal of the start lever 210.

  The 32nd pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is a signal input of a reset switch (stop release / error release switch 215c), and the 32nd pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is a reset switch (stop release / stop). This is a relay output of the signal of the error release switch 215c). The 33rd pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the signal of the left reel stop button 211a corresponding to the first reel, and the 33rd pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the left stop corresponding to the first reel. This is a relay output of the signal of the button 211a. The 34th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the signal of the middle reel stop button 211b corresponding to the second reel, and the 34th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the middle reel corresponding to the second reel. It is a relay output of the signal of the stop button 211b. The 35th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the signal of the right reel stop button 211c corresponding to the third reel, and the 35th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the right reel corresponding to the third reel. It is a relay output of the signal of the stop button 211c.

  The 36th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED1, and the 36th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay input of the lighting signal of the stop button LED1. The 37th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED2, and the 37th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the lighting signal of the stop button LED2. The 38th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED3, and the 38th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay input of the lighting signal of the stop button LED3. The 39th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the output of the lighting signal of the stored medal insertion switch LED, and the 39th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay input of the lighting signal of the stored medal insertion switch LED. .

  The 40th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the input of the backup power supply (-) (0V), and the 40th pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the backup power supply (-) (0V). . The 41st pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is an S + 5V (sensor + 5V power supply) output, and the 41st pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is an S + 5V (sensor + 5V power supply) relay input. The 42nd pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the backup power supply (+) (+ 5V), and the 42nd pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the backup power supply (+) (+ 5V). .

  The 43rd to 49th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all the ground GND, and the 43rd to 49th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all the ground GND. In addition, the 50th to 56th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all + 12V power input, and the 50th to 56th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all + 12V power relay outputs. It is.

  The 57th to 60th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all the ground GND, and the 57th to 60th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all the ground GND. Also, the pins 61 to 64 of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all inputs of + 30V power, and the pins 61 to 64 of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all outputs of + 30V power. It is.

[Main control board]
FIG. 43 is a block diagram of the main control board 409 and the peripheral control board 750 arranged on the game unit side. As shown in FIG. 43, the main control board 409 is connected to the above-mentioned main relay board 122, and a game state display board 450 is connected by a connector constituted of 12 pins, and a connector constituted of 24 pins. The reel main relay board 312 is connected via the two terminals, and the function separating relay terminal board 441 is connected by two connectors each having eight pins. Although not shown, the gaming state display board 450 is provided with a credit display unit, a game number display unit, a payout number display unit, a medal in lamp, a start lamp, a bet lamp, a bonus flag notification lamp, and the like. A reel motor relay board corresponding to the left reel 301a is connected to the reel main relay board 312 via a connector composed of 8 pins, and a reel motor relay board corresponding to the middle reel 301b is composed of 8 pins. The reel motor relay board corresponding to the right reel 301c is connected via a connector composed of 8 pins.

  Although not shown, the main control board 409 includes a main control MPU as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), the above-described left reel drive motor 303a, and medium reel drive. A drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the motor 303b and the right reel drive motor 303c, a setting key (keyhole) for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1, a setting switch / error release, a hitting presence / absence switch, A checkout switch is provided. The main control MPU has a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU includes the 1-bet button 205, the MAX bet button 206, the stored medal settlement button 209, the start lever 210, the reel stop button 211 (the left reel stop button 211a, the middle reel stop button 211b, and the right reel stop button 211c. ), Medal selector 207 (lockout solenoid, passage sensor, lever sensor), door opening detection switch 220, game medal payout count switch of the medal payout device 110, and detection from the medal auxiliary storage switch 111a of the auxiliary storage box 111 for medals. Signals are input via the main control I / O port, and based on these detection signals, a lockout solenoid, a credit display unit, a game number display unit, a payout number display unit, a medal in lamp, a start lamp, a bet Lamp with bonus flag A drive signal to the drive means of the known lamp and medal payout device 110, via the main control I / O port, and outputs.

  The main control MPU includes a main control I / O port and a reel main relay board 312, a left reel drive motor 303a that rotates the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c through the reel motor relay boards, respectively. Left reel position sensor, middle reel position sensor, and right reel position for outputting drive signals to reel drive motor 303b and right reel drive motor 303c, and detecting original positions of left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c, respectively. A detection signal from the sensor is input.

  The main control MPU receives a signal from a setting switch / error release, a stop / non-stop switch, a settlement / non-payout switch, a stop / release cancel switch 215c, a medal payout signal, a main control I / O port, A medal insertion signal, a game status, and the like are output to the external relay terminal board 131.

"Setting switch / error reset"
The role of the setting switch / error cancellation changes depending on the status of the setting key. When the setting key is OFF (playable state), it functions as an error release switch. On the other hand, when the setting key is ON (setting change state), it functions as a setting switch.

[Setting key and setting switch / error reset]
Next, a procedure for changing the setting of the slot machine 1 will be described. First, the slot machine 1 is turned off, and the setting key switch is operated in this state. Specifically, a predetermined key is inserted into the setting key switch, and the key is rotated 90 degrees to the right. Next, the slot machine 1 is turned on with the key inserted in the setting key switch. The power is turned on by operating the power switch of the power supply unit. When the power is turned on, the current setting of the slot machine 1 is displayed on the credit display unit (for example, in the case of setting 1, “1” is displayed on the credit display unit). Next, the setting switch is operated. When the setting switch is operated, a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value displayed on the credit display unit is displayed. However, when the displayed numerical value is 6, the displayed value is returned to 1 without being added. When the setting switch is operated in this way and a desired setting value is displayed on the credit display unit, the start lever 210 is operated. By operating the start lever 210, the setting is confirmed. Rotate the key switch 90 degrees to the left, and remove the key inserted in the setting key switch. When the power is turned on next time, the gaming machine operates with the set value set previously.

[Stopper switch]
First, “stopping” is a state in which a medal is not accepted after the bonus game is over. The stop / non-stop switch is a switch for determining whether to “stop” after the bonus game ends or to allow the game to be continued.

[Checkout switch]
“Checkout” means that credits are settled after the bonus game is completed, that is, medals for the credits are paid out. The settlement / non-payment switch is a switch for determining whether or not to “settlement” after the bonus game ends or “settlement”.

  The external relay terminal board 131 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). The hall computer grasps the number of medals inserted into the slot machine 1 by a medal insertion signal, grasps the number of medals paid out by the slot machine 1 by a medal payout signal, and the gaming state of the slot machine 1 by the game status Count management is done by grasping.

  In FIG. 43, a function separation relay terminal plate 441 is connected to the main control board 409 by two connectors each having eight pins. Further, a peripheral control board 750 (sub-control board), which will be described later, is connected to the function separation relay terminal board 441 by two connectors each having eight pins. A connector composed of 8 pins without arrows is for power supply relay, and ground GND is composed of 4 pins, + 12V power supply is composed of 2 pins, and + 30V power supply is composed of 2 pins. Further, a connector composed of 8 pins indicated by arrows, such as main control board 409 → function separating relay terminal board 441 → peripheral control board 750, is used for transmitting various commands related to games, and parallel data (command) D0. ~ D3 4 pins, SEL (select signal) is 1 pin, WR (write signal, corresponding to the strobe signal of claim 1) is 1 pin, power failure warning signal is 1 pin, and ground GND is 1 pin. Yes. The main control MPU transmits various commands related to games to a peripheral control board 750 described later via the main control I / O and function separation relay terminal board 441.

[Connector connection between main control board 409 and peripheral control board 750]
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the number of pins of each connector and signals transmitted by each pin by the connectors CN4 and CN5 of the main control board 409 and the connectors CN1 and CN2 of the peripheral control board 750. As shown in FIG. 55, the connector CN4 of the main control board 409 is connected to the connector CN1 of the peripheral control board 750, and the connector CN5 of the main control board 409 is connected to the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 750. The connector CN4 of the main control board 409 and the connector CN1 of the peripheral control board 750 are configured with 8 pins, and the connector CN5 of the main control board 409 and the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 750 are configured with 8 pins. The pin number of the connector CN4 of the main control board 409 and the pin number of the connector CN1 of the peripheral control board 750 correspond to each other, and the pin number of the connector CN5 of the main control board 409 and the connector of the peripheral control board 750 The same numbers correspond to the pin numbers of CN2. The connector CN5 of the main control board 409 and the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 750 are for sending various commands related to the game.

  The 1st and 2nd pins of the connector CN4 of the main control board 409 are the ground GND, and the 1st and 2nd pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral control board 750 are also the ground GND. The 3rd and 4th pins of the connector CN4 of the main control board 409 are + 12V power output, and the 3rd and 4th pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral control board 750 are + 12V power input. Further, the 5th and 6th pins of the connector CN4 of the main control board 409 are outputs of + 30V power, and the 5th and 6th pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral control board 750 are inputs of + 30V power. Further, the 7th and 8th pins of the connector CN4 of the main control board 409 are the ground GND, and the 7th and 8th pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral control board 750 are also the ground GND.

  The 1st to 4th pins of the connector CN5 of the main control board 409 are outputs of parallel command data D0 to D3, and the 1st to 4th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 750 are command data D0 to D0. Each input of D3. The fifth pin of the connector CN5 on the main control board 409 is an output of the SEL signal (select signal), and the fifth pin of the connector CN2 on the peripheral control board 750 is an input of the SEL signal. Note that the fifth pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 750 is provided on the peripheral control board 750, and an interrupt terminal (INT2 terminal) of the sub CPU that performs control related to the effects corresponding to the command data D0 to D3. It is connected to the. The 6th pin of the connector CN5 of the main control board 409 is the output of the WR signal (write signal, corresponding to the strobe signal of claim 1), and the 6th pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 750 is the WR signal. Signal input. In addition, the WR signal in this embodiment is synonymous with what is generally called a strobe signal. The 6th pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 750 is connected to the interrupt terminal (INT1 terminal) of the sub CPU. The 7th pin of the connector CN5 of the main control board 409 is an output of a power failure warning signal, and the 7th pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 750 is an input of a power failure warning signal. Further, the eighth pin of the connector CN5 of the main control board 409 is the ground GND, and the eighth pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 750 is also the ground GND.

[Peripheral control board 750 (sub control board)]
Although not shown, the peripheral control board 750 is a peripheral control MPU (corresponding to a sub CPU) as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a VDP (display control for the image display 500). Video Display Processor), image ROM for storing various images to be displayed on the 15.9 liquid crystal module 500b, sound source IC for performing high-quality sound, sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC are stored. A sound ROM is provided. The peripheral control MPU incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port and a serial input / output port.

  The peripheral control board 750 is connected to the above-described function separation relay terminal board 441 by two 8-pin connectors, and to the reel illumination LED board (upper) 503a by a 2-pin connector. The reel illumination LED substrate (lower) 503b is connected by a connector composed of 2 pins, and the reel peripheral relay substrate 317 is connected via a connector composed of 12 pins. A backlight relay board corresponding to the left reel 301a (first reel) is connected to the reel peripheral relay board 317 via a connector composed of 4 pins, and the first reel is connected to the backlight relay board from the rear side. A backlight substrate having a light emitter to be illuminated is connected to a connector. Similarly, a backlight relay board corresponding to the middle reel 301b (second reel) is connected to the reel peripheral relay board 317 via a connector composed of 4 pins, and the second reel is connected to the backlight relay board. A backlight substrate having a light emitter that illuminates from behind is connected to a connector. Further, a backlight relay board corresponding to the right reel 301c (third reel) is connected to the reel peripheral relay board 317 via a connector composed of 4 pins, and the third reel is placed behind the backlight relay board 317. A backlight substrate provided with a light emitter for illuminating from is connected to the connector.

  Further, the peripheral control board 750 is connected to the liquid crystal inverter board 500a by a connector constituted by 3 pins, and the 15.9 liquid crystal module 500b is connected by a connector constituted by 20 pins, and is a connector constituted by 2 pins. Thus, the fan motor 500c of the image display body 500 is connected. Further, the liquid crystal inverter board 500a and the 15.9 liquid crystal module 500b are connected by a connector composed of 3 pins, and the liquid crystal inverter board 500a generates a backlight operating voltage of about + 200V with a + 30V power supply as an input. .9 to the liquid crystal module 500b.

[Connector connection between peripheral control board 750 and peripheral relay board 123]
44 is a block diagram of the peripheral control board 750 provided on the game unit side and the peripheral relay board 123 provided on the main body side (the wiring relay member 113 provided on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100). The peripheral control board 750 and the peripheral relay board 123 are connected by a connector connection composed of 20 pins. Further, the peripheral relay board 123 is shown in FIG.

[Peripheral relay board 123]
As shown in FIG. 45, the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to a connector 427 with a harness 427 (see FIG. 16-1) connected to the peripheral control board 750 (see FIGS. 14 and 15; hereinafter, peripheral relay). A connector CN1 of the board 123), a connector CN2 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123) connected to a door decoration drive board 860 disposed on the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200, which will be described later, and a bass speaker (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123). A connector CN3 (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral relay board 123) connected to a speaker disposed on the back plate 104 at a rear position of the medal payout device 110 disposed in the lower part of the outer main body 100 in FIG. 1 (see FIG. 25). Connector CN3). The peripheral relay board 123 serves as a relay (relay input or relay output) for simply passing various signals and power supply voltages.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 (via the connection between the connector 125 of FIG. 15 and the connector 427 with the harness 426 of FIG. 16-1). Connected). The connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 and the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 are configured with 20 pins.

  FIG. 50 shows the number of pins of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 and the signal transmitted by each pin, the number of pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 and the signal transmitted by each pin, and the connector of the peripheral relay board 123 It is a figure which shows CN2 and the number of pins of connector CN3, and the signal transmitted by each pin.

  The first pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 is -SPK-W2 (a negative output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221), and the first pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is -SPK-W2. Relay input (minus relay input for woofer W2 of bass speaker 221). The second pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 is + SPK-W2 (plus output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221), and the second pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of + SPK-W2. (It is a positive relay input for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221).

  The third pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 is -SPK-W1 (a negative output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), and the third pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is -SPK-W1. Relay input (minus relay input for woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221). The fourth pin of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 750 is + SPK-W1 (plus output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), and the fourth pin of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of + SPK-W1. (It is a positive relay input for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221).

  The fifth pin of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 750 is -SPK-L (the negative output of the left speaker 201a), and the fifth pin of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of -SPK-L. (It is a minus relay input of the left speaker 201a). The 6th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 is + SPK-L (the positive output of the left speaker 201a), and the 6th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a + SPK-L relay input (left This is a positive relay input of the speaker 201a).

  The seventh pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 is -SPK-R (the negative output of the right speaker 201b), and the seventh pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of -SPK-R. (It is a minus relay input of the right speaker 201b). The eighth pin of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 750 is + SPK-R (the positive output of the right speaker 201b), and the eighth pin of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 is the relay input of + SPK-R (right This is a positive relay input of the speaker 201b).

  The 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 are the ground GND, and the 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 are also the ground GND. The 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 750 are outputs of + 12V power, and the 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 are relay inputs of + 12V power.

  The 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 are the ground GND, and the 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 are also the ground GND.

  The 15th pin of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 750 is an S-LATCH output (latch signal output), and the 15th pin of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-LATCH relay input (latch signal). Relay input). The 16th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 750 is an S-MODE output (mode signal output), and the 16th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-MODE relay input (mode signal). Relay input). The 17th pin of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 750 is an S-CLK output (clock signal output), and the 17th pin of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-CLK relay input (clock) Signal relay input). Pin 18 of connector CN3 of peripheral control board 750 is S-DATA (output of serial lighting data), and pin 18 of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of S-DATA (serial Is the relay input of the lighting data.)

  Pin 19 of connector CN3 of peripheral control board 750 is SEL1 (output of select signal 1), and pin 18 of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of SEL1 (relay input of select signal 1) Is). Pin 20 of connector CN3 of peripheral control board 750 is SEL0 (output of select signal 0), and pin 20 of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of SEL0 (relay input of select signal 0) Is).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is composed of 20 pins and is connected to the door decoration drive board 860. As shown by a “door block” surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 44, a door decoration driving board 860, a top decoration board 871, an upper left decoration board 872, a lower left decoration board 873, an upper right decoration board 874, and a lower right decoration board. 875, the lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876, the L speaker (left speaker) 201a, the R speaker (right speaker) 201b, and the lower panel illumination 877 connected to the lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 are disposed on the door-shaped front member 200. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the door decoration driving board 860 includes a top decoration board 871, an upper left decoration board 872, a lower left decoration board 873, an upper right decoration board 874, a lower right decoration board 875, a lower panel illumination lighting board 876, and an L speaker 201a. , R speaker 201b is connected. In this way, the door decoration drive board 860 that drives the lighting of the door-side decorative luminous body (described later) disposed on the door-shaped front member 200 is separated from the peripheral control board 750 and is thus separated into the door-shaped front member 200. It is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 52, a top decorative board connection connector 861 that connects a connector with a harness connected to the top decorative board 871 to the outer surface of the storage case cover 803 of the door decorative drive board storage portion 801 of the door board storage case 800. 44 (configured with 12 pins as shown in FIG. 44), upper left decorative board connection connector 862 (configured with 13 pins as shown in FIG. 44) to connect the connector with harness connected to the upper left decorative board 872, and lower left 44. A left lower decorative board connection connector 863 (consisting of 6 pins as shown in FIG. 44) for connecting a harness-connected connector connected to the decorative board 873 and a harness upper connector connected to the upper right decorative board 874. Connected to the board connector 864 (configured with 13 pins as shown in FIG. 44) and the lower right decorative board 875 44 for a lower panel illumination lighting board for connecting a connector with a harness connected to the lower panel lighting lighting board 876 and a connector 865 for a lower right decorative board for connecting a connector with a cableness (configured with 6 pins as shown in FIG. 44). A connector 866 (configured with two pins as shown in FIG. 44), an L speaker connector 867 (configured with two pins as shown in FIG. 44) for connecting a connector with a harness connected to the L speaker 201a, and Each connector transmits an R speaker connection connector 868 (configured with two pins as shown in FIG. 44) for connecting a connector with a harness connected to the R speaker 201b to the peripheral relay board 123 on the main body side from the door decoration drive board 860. The connector connector member 859 to be sent out (configured with a 20-pin female die) is disposed in an exposed state.

[Connector connection between peripheral relay board 123 and door decoration drive board 860]
As shown in FIG. 44, the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to the connector CN1 of the peripheral control board 750. The connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 and the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 750 are configured with 20 pins.

  The door decoration drive board 860 and the peripheral relay board 123 are connected to a connector with a harness for connecting to the body (conventionally provided) with a connector member connected to the body connection connector member 859 (CN1) of the door decoration drive board 860 at one end. A connection member with a harness for connecting to the main body is connected to the connector connecting member 859 (CN1) of the door decoration drive board 860 to the peripheral relay board. The other end of the connector 910 with harness for connecting to the main body (see FIG. 14) is connected to the connector CN2 of 123 (see FIG. 45).

  50, only the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is shown, and CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 is not shown. The first pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is the relay output of SEL0 (the relay output of the select signal 0), and the first pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is the input of SEL0 (the input of the select signal 0) Is). The second pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is the relay output of SEL1 (the relay output of the select signal 1), and the second pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is the input of SEL1 (the input of the select signal 1) Is).

  The third pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-DATA relay output (a relay output of serial lighting data), and the third pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is an S-DATA input ( Serial lighting data input). The 4th pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-CLK relay output (clock signal relay output), and the 4th pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is an S-CLK input (clock signal). Input).

  The fifth pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-MODE relay output (mode signal relay output), and the fifth pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is an S-MODE input (mode signal). Input). The 6th pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is the S-LATCH relay output (the relay output of the latch signal), and the 6th pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is the S-LATCH input (the latch signal). Input).

  The 7th and 8th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are the ground GND, and the 7th and 8th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 are also the ground GND. The 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are relay outputs of + 12V power, and the 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 are inputs of + 12V power. The 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are the ground GND, and the 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 are also the ground GND.

  The 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are + SPK-R relay outputs (plus relay output of the right speaker 201b), and the 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860. The number pin is an input of + SPK-R (a positive input of the right speaker 201b). The 15th and 16th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are -SPK-R relay outputs (the negative relay output of the right speaker 201b), the 15th pin of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860, and The 16th pin is an input of -SPK-R (a negative input of the right speaker 201b).

  The 17th and 18th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are + SPK-L relay outputs (plus relay output of the left speaker 201a), and the 17th and 18th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860. The number pin is an input of + SPK-L (a plus input of the left speaker 201a). The 19th and 20th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are -SPK-L relay outputs (the negative relay output of the left speaker 201a), the 19th pin of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860, and The 20th pin is an input of -SPK-L (a negative input of the left speaker 201a).

[Connector connection between peripheral relay board 123 and bass speaker 221]
As shown in FIG. 44, the connector CN3 of the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to the bass speaker 221. The connector CN3 of the peripheral relay board 123 is composed of 4 pins. As shown in FIG. 50, the first pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral relay board 123 is + SPK-W1 (plus output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), and the second pin of the connector CN3 is -SPK- W1 (a minus output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), the third pin of the connector CN3 is + SPK-W2 (a plus output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221), and the connector CN3 The fourth pin is -SPK-W2 (a negative output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221).

[Arrangement of each decorative board of door-shaped front member 200]
The arrangement positions of the above-described top decorative substrate 871, upper left decorative substrate 872, lower left decorative substrate 873, upper right decorative substrate 874, lower right decorative substrate 875, and lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 are shown in FIG. The top decorative substrate 871 is fitted into an edge member 214b that forms the upper side of the transparent plate 214a disposed in the upper half of the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200 and facing in the left-right direction. The upper left decorative substrate 872 is fitted into an edge member 214b that forms the left side of the transparent plate 214a facing in the vertical direction. The lower left decorative board 873 is located on the left side of the design board 230 (a member on which a character or the like symbolizing a game model is printed on a transparent resin board) arranged below the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. It is fitted into the interior of a substantially triangular decorative panel. The upper right decorative substrate 874 is fitted into an edge member 214b that forms the right side of the transparent plate 214a facing in the vertical direction. The lower right decorative board 875 is fitted inside a substantially triangular decorative panel located on the right side of the design plate 230. The lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 and the lower panel illumination 877 are disposed behind the design plate 230. The lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 is composed of an inverter, and the lower panel illumination 877 is composed of a cold cathode tube, and illuminates the design plate 230 from behind.

[Control by peripheral control board 750]
The sub-control block shown in FIG. 43 is composed of a portion divided by a dotted line in FIG. 43, a door block portion connected to the peripheral relay board 123 shown in FIG. 44, and a bass speaker 221. Yes. When the peripheral control MPU (corresponding to the sub CPU) of the peripheral control board 750 in FIG. 43 receives various commands from the main control board 409, based on the various commands, the reel illumination LED boards 503a and 503b and the backlight described above are used. A lighting signal for turning on the light emitting diodes on the substrate (first reel to third reel) is output, or the light emitting body is disposed on the upper left decorative substrate 872 and the light emitter disposed on the lower left decorative substrate 873. The left illuminant 217A (described later), the right illuminant 217B (described later) configured by the illuminant disposed on the upper right decorative substrate 874 and the illuminant disposed on the lower right decorative substrate 875 are lit in gradation. A door decoration drive base provided separately from the peripheral control board 750 in which a gradation lighting signal (one aspect of lighting control data for lighting control) is disposed on the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200. The door decoration drive board 860 outputs a flashing signal (one aspect of lighting control data for lighting control) that is output via the 860 or blinks the upper light emitter 217C (described later) disposed on the top decoration board 871 described above. Or output via.

  The blinking signals to the left illuminator 217A and the right illuminator 217B and the gradation lighting signal to the upper illuminator 217C are output in synchronization with the clock signal S-CLK from the serial input / output port of the peripheral control MPU. Door decoration based on serial data S-DATA (corresponding to lighting control data) and mode signal S-MODE, latch signal S-LATCH and select signals SEL0 and SEL1 output from the parallel input / output port The drive substrate 860 outputs to the left light emitter 217A, the right light emitter 217B, and the upper light emitter 217C.

  The VDP of the peripheral control board 750 reads out an image from the image ROM based on a control signal output from the peripheral control MPU and performs display control of the 15.9 liquid crystal module 500b. The 15.9 liquid crystal module 500b has a built-in backlight (cold cathode tube) and is lit by the liquid crystal inverter board 500a.

  The sound source IC of the peripheral control board 750 reads the sound information from the sound ROM based on the control signal output from the peripheral control MPU, and the bass speaker 221 connected via the peripheral relay board 123 and the door decoration drive board 860. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the L speaker 201a and the R speaker 201b of the door-type front member 200.

[Door decoration drive board 860]
Next, the door decoration drive substrate 860 will be described. FIG. 53 is a simple circuit diagram of the door decoration drive board. As shown in FIG. 53, the door decoration drive board 860 includes a select circuit 860a, a switch circuit 860b, and a drive circuit 860c. Here, various signals input to the door decoration drive board 860 will be described first. Subsequently, the select circuit 860a, the switch circuit 860b, and the drive circuit 860c will be described. In FIG. 53, illustration of direct current +5 volts (V) that is a control voltage supplied to the select circuit 860a and the like and direct current + 12V that is a drive voltage supplied to the left light emitter 217A and the like is omitted.

[Various signals input to the door decoration drive board 860]
As shown in FIG. 53, the door decoration drive board 860 receives serial data S-DATA from the peripheral control MPU (serial input / output port) of the peripheral control board 750 in synchronization with the clock signal S-CLK. In this embodiment, the clock signal S-CLK is set so that information of 250 kb (kilobits) can be output per second (s).

  The serial data S-DATA includes gradation lighting data for gradation lighting of the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B and blinking data for blinking the upper light emitter 217C, which are different in data format. The gradation lighting data is composed of gradation data and lighting data. Note that a plurality of these blinking data and gradation lighting data are separately stored as a table in advance in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 750, and the peripheral control MPU refers to those tables as needed to store one data. It is created as serial data S-DATA and output to the door decoration drive board 860.

  In addition to the clock signal S-CLK and serial data S-DATA, the door decoration drive board 860 includes select signals SEL0 and SEL1, a mode signal S-MODE and a latch signal S-LATCH from the peripheral control MPU (parallel input / output port). Is entered. The select signals SEL0 and SEL1 are signals for transmitting to the switch circuit 860b whether the serial data S-DATA output from the peripheral control MPU (serial input / output port) is blinking data or gradation lighting data. The signal S-MODE is a signal that tells the driving circuit 860c whether the gradation lighting data is gradation data or lighting data, and the latch signal S-LATCH is the serial data S-DATA captured by the driving circuit 860c. Based on the above, the fact that the output of the gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B is transmitted to the drive circuit 860c via the switch circuit 860b, or the blink signal is started to be output to the upper light emitter 217C. Is transmitted to the drive circuit 860c via the switch circuit 860b.

  As for the wiring between the peripheral control board 750 and the door decoration drive board 860, one end of a connector with a harness having connectors for connection (20 pins) at both ends is connected to the connector CN3 (20 pins) of the peripheral control board 750. As shown in FIG. 16A, the other end 427 of the connector with the harness (426) is attached to the connector holder 428 (the above configuration is the gaming unit side), and as shown in FIG. It is connected to a connector 125 (CN1, 20 pins in FIGS. 44 and 45) (outside main body 100 side) of the peripheral relay board 123 housed in the wiring relay member 113. And as shown in FIG. 14, one end of the connector with the harness 910 having the connector (20 pins) for connection at both ends is connected to the connector CN2 (20 pins) of the peripheral relay board 123. The end is extended to the door-shaped front member 200 and connected to the connector CN1 (20 pins) of the door decoration drive board 860 (see reference numeral 859 in FIG. 52 and FIG. 44). Through these harnesses, the clock signal S-CLK, serial data S-DATA, select signals SEL0, SEL1, mode signal S-MODE and latch signal S-LATCH from the peripheral control MPU are transmitted to the door decoration drive board 860. It has become.

[Select circuit 860a]
As shown in FIG. 53, the select circuit 860a includes inverters IC1A and IC1B (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TC74HC14), and logical products IC2A and IC3A (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TC74HC08). Configured.

  Each of the inverters IC1A and IC1B includes eight inverting circuits, and select signals SEL0 and SEL1 are input to two of them (IC1A and IC1B), respectively. The logical products IC2A and IC3A have four logical product circuits (the same applies to IC2B to IC2D and IC3B to IC3D described later). The select signal SEL0 input to the input terminal 1 of the inverter IC1A inverts the input logic, is output from the output terminal 2 as the inverted select signal SEL0 ', and is input to the input terminal 2 of the logical product IC2A. Since the select signal SEL1 is input to the input terminal 1 of the logical product IC2A and the logical product IC2A is a logical product circuit, the logical product of the input terminals 1 and 2 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 3 to the switch circuit. Is output to 860b.

  The select signal SEL1 input to the input terminal 3 of the inverter IC1B inverts the input logic, is output from the output terminal 4 as the inverted select signal SEL1 ′, and is input to the input terminal 2 of the logical product IC3A. Since the select signal SEL0 is input to the input terminal 1 of the logical product IC3A, and the logical product IC3A is a logical product circuit, the logical product of the input terminals 1 and 2 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 3 to the switch circuit. Is output to 860b.

[Switch circuit 860b]
As shown in FIG. 53, the switch circuit 860b to which the calculation results by the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input includes logical products IC2B to IC2D and IC3B to IC3D. Serial data S-DATA is input to the input terminals 4 of the logical products IC2B and IC3B, and the operation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input to the input terminal 5 of the logical products IC2B and IC3B. Since the logical products IC2B and IC3B are logical product circuits, the logical product of the input terminals 4 and 5 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 6 to the drive circuit 860c.

  In this way, depending on the calculation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a (when the output of IC2A is HI, the output of IC3A is LOW, and when the output of IC3A is HI, the output of IC2A is LOW), serial Whether data S-DATA is output from the output terminal 6 of the logical product IC2B to the drive circuit 860c or output from the output terminal 6 of the logical product IC3B to the drive circuit 860c is switched.

  When noise enters a harness (not shown) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 750 and the door decoration drive board 860 and the selector signals SEL0 and SEL1 have the same logic, the logical product IC2A of the select circuit 860a, The serial data S-DATA is not output from the output terminal 6 of the logical product IC2B to the drive circuit 860c and output terminal of the logical product IC3B depending on the calculation result by the IC3A (because both the outputs of IC2A and IC3A are LOW). 6 is not output to the drive circuit 860c. This prevents the serial data S-DATA affected by noise from being output to the drive circuit 860c (prevents unintended serial data S-DATA from being output to the drive circuit 860c). Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the serial data S-DATA.

  The clock signal S-CLK is input to the input terminals 9 of the logical products IC2C and IC3C, and the operation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input to the input terminal 10 of the logical products IC2C and IC3C. Since the logical products IC2C and IC3C are logical product circuits, the logical product of the input terminals 9 and 10 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 8 to the drive circuit 860c.

  As described above, according to the calculation result by the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a (when the output of IC2A is HI, the output of IC3A is LOW, and when the output of IC3A is HI, the output of IC2A is LOW), the clock Whether the signal S-CLK is output from the output terminal 8 of the logical product IC2C to the drive circuit 860c or output from the output terminal 8 of the logical product IC3C to the drive circuit 860c is switched.

  When noise enters a harness (not shown) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 750 and the door decoration drive board 860 and the selector signals SEL0 and SEL1 have the same logic, the logical product IC2A of the select circuit 860a, The clock signal S-CLK is not output from the output terminal 8 of the logical product IC2C to the drive circuit 860c and output terminal of the logical product IC3C depending on the calculation result by the IC3A (when the outputs of the IC2A and IC3A are both LOW). 8 is not output to the drive circuit 860c. As a result, the clock signal S-CLK affected by noise is not output to the drive circuit 860c. Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the clock signal S-CLK.

  The latch signal S-LATCH is input to the input terminals 12 of the logical products IC2D and IC3D, and the operation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input to the input terminal 13 of the logical products IC2D and IC3D. Since the logical products IC2D and IC3D are logical product circuits, the logical product of the input terminals 12 and 13 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 11 to the drive circuit 860c.

  In this way, depending on the calculation result of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a (when the output of IC2A is HI, the output of IC3A is LOW, and when the output of IC3A is HI, the output of IC2A is LOW), the latch The signal S-LATCH is switched between output from the output terminal 11 of the logical product IC2D to the drive circuit 860c or output from the output terminal 11 of the logical product IC3D to the drive circuit 860c.

  When noise enters a harness (not shown) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 750 and the door decoration drive board 860 and the selector signals SEL0 and SEL1 have the same logic, the logical product IC2A of the select circuit 860a, The latch signal S-LATCH is not output from the output terminal 11 of the logical product IC2D to the drive circuit 860c and output terminal of the logical product IC3D depending on the calculation result by the IC3A (when the outputs of the IC2A and IC3A are both LOW). 11 is not output to the drive circuit 860c. As a result, the latch signal S-LATCH affected by noise is not output to the drive circuit 860c. Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the latch signal S-LATCH.

[Drive circuit 860c]
As shown in FIG. 53, the drive circuit 860c to which the operation results by the logical products IC2B to IC2D and IC3B to IC3D of the switch circuit 860b are input includes the blinking control IC4, the left gradation control IC5, and the right gradation control IC6. It is prepared for.

[Blinking control IC4]
In this embodiment, the blinking control IC 4 uses TB62709 manufactured by Shibaura Electric, Tokyo. The TB 62709 is a constant current driver and can directly drive a light emitting diode or the like. The operation result of the logical product IC3B of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the serial data S-DATA is input to the DATA-IN terminal of the blinking control IC4, and the operation of the logical product IC3C of the switch circuit 860b is input to the CLOCK terminal of the blinking control IC4. The result, that is, the clock signal S-CLK is input, and the calculation result of the logical product IC3D of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the latch signal S-LATCH is input to the LOAD terminal of the blinking control IC4. The serial data S-DATA fetched by the blinking control IC 4 is described later in detail, but the logic of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 is controlled to become blinking data.

  In this way, the blinking control IC 4 takes in the serial data S-DATA (flashing data), and when the latch signal S-LATCH is input, based on the taken-in serial data S-DATA (flashing data). The flashing signal is output from the OUT-a terminal to the OUT-g terminal to the upper light emitter 217C. This blinking signal is a constant current, and this constant current flows to the upper light emitter 217C, and the upper light emitter 217C is turned on or blinks.

[Left side gradation control IC 5 and right side gradation control IC 6]
In the present embodiment, the left-side gradation control IC 5 and the right-side gradation control IC 6 use TLC 5922 manufactured by Texas Instruments (TI). This TLC5922 has 16 channels of output, and each output channel can flow a programmable constant current in the range of 0 to 80 milliamperes (mA) in addition to individual ON / OFF control. Is set based on the MODE signal). In addition, a maximum output current can be set by one external resistor (not shown), and the output current can be output for each channel in 128 steps from 0 to 127 with respect to this maximum output current.

  The calculation result of the logical product IC2B of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the serial data S-DATA, is input to the SIN terminal of the left-side gradation control IC5, and is input to the SCLK terminals of the left-side gradation control IC5 and the right-side gradation control IC6. Is the operation result of the logical product IC2C of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the clock signal S-CLK, and the XLAT terminals of the left gradation control IC5 and the right gradation control IC6 are connected to the logical product IC2D of the switch circuit 860b. An operation result, that is, a latch signal S-LATCH is input. Further, the SOUT terminal of the left gradation control IC 5 and the SIN terminal of the right gradation control IC 6 are electrically connected, and the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 are daisy chain connected. Yes. As a result, the serial data S-DATA input to the SIN terminal of the left gradation control IC 5 is input from the SOUT terminal to the SIN terminal of the right gradation control IC 6, and the left gradation control IC 5 and right gradation control. The IC 6 can take in the serial data S-DATA. The mode signal S-MODE is input to the MODE terminals of the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6. The serial data S-DATA captured by the left-side gradation control IC 5 and the right-side gradation control IC 6 will be described in detail later, but controls the logic of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1, and controls gradation data and lighting. The gradation lighting data is composed of data.

  As described above, the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 take in the serial data S-DATA (gradation lighting data) and, when the latch signal S-LATCH is inputted, take it in as an opportunity. Based on the serial data S-DATA (gradation lighting data), the left gradation control IC 5 outputs a gradation lighting signal from its OUT0 to OUT15 terminals to the left light emitter 217A, and the right gradation control IC 6 A gradation lighting signal is output from the OUT0 terminal to OUT15 terminal to the right light emitter 217B. In the gradation lighting signal, a current of 0 to 127 steps with respect to the maximum output current based on the set gradation data flows to the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B, and the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B. Lights up or gradations.

[Output sequence of blinking data and gradation lighting data]
Next, an output sequence of serial data S-DATA output from the peripheral control MPU (serial input / output port) of the peripheral control board 750 described above will be described. As described above, the serial data S-DATA is composed of blinking data and gradation data, and a plurality of serial data S-DATA is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 750 as a table. The peripheral control MPU creates these as serial data S-DATA with reference to those tables as necessary, and outputs them to the door decoration drive board 860.

  FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing an example of an output sequence of serial data. As shown in FIG. 54, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 750 outputs the select signal SEL0 from the parallel input / output port with the logic set to HI and outputs the select signal SEL1 with the logic set to LOW (timing T0). By setting the logic of the select signal SEL0 to HI and the logic of the select signal SEL1 to LOW, the door decoration drive board 860 is informed that the serial data S-DATA is blinking data.

  After the timing T0, the blinking data output sequence is started (timing T1), and the blinking data, which is the serial data S-DATA, is synchronized with the clock signal S-CLK from the serial input / output port to the door decoration drive board 860. As soon as they are output one by one and the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH is set to LOW from the parallel input / output port, the blinking control IC 4 of the door decoration drive board 860 shown in FIG. 53 takes in the blinking data. After that, when all the blinking data is output from the serial input / output port, the blinking control IC 4 takes in the latch signal S-LATCH as an opportunity by outputting the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH from the parallel input / output port to HI. Based on the blink data, a blink signal is output to the upper light emitter 217C, and the upper light emitter 217C is lit or blinks.

After the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH is set to HI from the parallel input / output port, the logic of the select signal SEL1 is output from LOW to HI from the parallel input / output port (timing T2). This completes the blinking data output sequence.

  After timing T2, the logic of the select signal SEL0 is output from the parallel input / output port from HI to LOW, and the output sequence of gradation lighting data is started (timing T3). By setting the logic of the select signal SEL0 to LOW and the logic of the select signal SEL1 to HI, the door decoration drive board 860 is informed that the serial data S-DAT is gradation data.

  After timing T3, the grayscale data as serial data S-DATA is output to the door decoration drive board 860 bit by bit from the serial input / output port in synchronization with the clock signal S-CLK, and the latch signal S is output from the parallel input / output port. When the logic of -LATCH is set to LOW and output, the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 of the door decoration drive board 860 shown in FIG. 53 capture gradation lighting data. At this time, since the logic of the mode signal S-MODE is HI, the left-side gradation control IC 5 and the right-side gradation control IC 6 capture gradation data among gradation lighting data.

  When all the gradation data is output from the serial input / output port, although not shown, the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH is output from LOW to HI from the parallel input / output port, and then the latch signal S- The logic of LATCH is changed from HI to LOW and output. Then, the logic of the mode signal S-MODE is changed from HI to LOW from the parallel input / output port. At this time, since the logic of the mode signal S-MODE is LOW, the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 take in the lighting data among the gradation lighting data. When all the lighting data among the gradation lighting data is output from the serial input / output port, the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH and the mode signal S-MODE is changed from LOW to HI from the parallel input / output port, thereby controlling the gradation for the left side. The IC5 and the right gradation control IC 6 output the gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A based on the gradation data captured with the latch signal S-LATCH as a trigger, and the right floor The tone control IC 6 outputs a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B, and the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B are lighted or gradation lighted.

  After the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH and the mode signal S-MODE is set to HI from the parallel input / output port, the logic of the select signal SEL1 is output from the HI to LOW from the parallel input / output port (timing T4). Thus, the gradation lighting data output sequence is completed.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above includes the peripheral control board 750 and the door decoration drive board 860. The peripheral control board 750 is mounted with a peripheral control MPU which is a microprocessor with a built-in serial input / output port and parallel input / output port. The door decoration drive board 860 is provided separately from the peripheral control board 750, and outputs a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C based on the serial data S-DATA output from the serial input / output port of the peripheral control MPU. Then, a gradation lighting signal is output to the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B.

  The door decoration drive substrate 860 includes a blinking control IC 4, a left gradation control IC 5, a right gradation control IC 6, and a selection circuit 860a. The blinking control IC 4 takes in blinking data of the serial data S-DATA and outputs a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C. The left gradation control IC 5 takes in the gradation lighting data of the serial data S-DATA and outputs a gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A. The right gradation control IC 6 takes in gradation lighting data of the serial data S-DATA and outputs a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B. The select circuit 860a outputs the serial data S-DATA to the blinking control IC 4 based on the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 output from the parallel input / output ports of the peripheral control MPU, or the left gradation control IC 5 and the right side. To output to the gray scale control IC 6.

  The serial data S-DATA is composed of blinking data of the blinking control IC 4 and gradation lighting data of the left gradation control IC 5 and right gradation control IC 6. Is different.

  As described above, the serial data S-DATA is composed of the blink data of the blink control IC 4 and the gradation lighting data of the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 which have different data formats. The select circuit 860a switches whether the serial data S-DATA is output to the blinking control IC 4 or to the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6. Therefore, even if the blinking control IC 4, the left-side gradation control IC 5, and the right-side gradation control IC 6 having different formats of the serial data S-DATA to be taken in can be handled as one serial data S-DATA.

  The blinking control IC 4 captures the blinking data and outputs a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C. The left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 capture gradation data composed of gradation data and lighting data. The left gradation control IC 5 outputs a gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A, and the right gradation control IC 6 outputs a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B.

  The serial data S-DATA is composed of flashing data and gradation lighting data having different formats, and the select circuit 860a receives two select signals SEL0 and SEL1 from the parallel input / output port of the peripheral control MPU. When the logic of the select signal SEL0 is HI and the logic of the select signal SEL1 is LOW, the blinking data is output to the blinking control IC 4, while the logic of the select signal SEL0 is LOW and the select signal SEL1 When is HI, the gradation lighting data is output to the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6.

  In this manner, the single serial data S-DATA, the blinking data to the blinking control IC 4, the gradation lighting data to the gradation control IC for the left side and the gradation control IC for the right side, and the select signal input to the selection circuit 860a. It can be output by SEL0 and SEL1. Accordingly, the blinking control IC 4 can output a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C based on the fetched blinking data, and the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 are based on the fetched gradation lighting data. Thus, the left gradation control IC 5 can output a gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A, and the right gradation control IC 6 can output a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B.

  Further, when the logics of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 input to the select circuit 860a are both HI or LOW, that is, when they are the same logic, the blinking control IC4, the left gradation control IC5 and the right floor are controlled by the switch circuit 860b. The serial data S-DATA, the clock signal S-CLK, and the latch signal S-LATCH are not output to the adjustment control IC 6. When noise enters the select signals SEL0 and SEL1, the logic becomes the same (same logic). Using this property, when the logic of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 input to the select circuit 860a becomes the same logic, the switch circuit 860b converts the serial data S-DATA affected by noise into the blinking control IC 4 and the left side. No output is made to the tone control IC 5 and the tone control IC 6 for the right side. Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the serial data S-DATA.

  As described above, when the gaming unit is attached to and detached from the opening 109 of the outer main body 100, the connector holder 428 is detachably coupled to the wiring relay member 113, so that the connector 425 (main control) of the connector holder 428 is attached. System wiring connector) and connector 124 (main relay connector) of main relay board 122 are detachably connected, and connector 427 (peripheral control system wiring connector) of connector holder 428 and peripheral relay are connected. Since the connector 125 (peripheral relay connector) of the board 123 is detachably connected, only two connectors are required for connection, so the number of connectors used for connection can be reduced, and when changing models , Separation / combination of game units as a model-dependent part of the model-independent body part It can be carried out easily.

  Since the lighting control data is output as serial data from the serial output port of the microprocessor (peripheral control MPU) of the peripheral control board 750 and is transmitted to the drive circuit 860c of the door decoration drive board 860 by serial communication, the peripheral relay The number of harnesses from the board 123 to the door decoration drive board 860 can be reduced (result of being able to use one signal line for transmitting lighting control data as one of S-DATA), and a door-shaped front member The number of harnesses in the bent portion near the hinge attached to the front side of the outer body 100 so that the 200 can rotate is reduced, and the harness is sandwiched between the door-shaped front member 200 and the outer body 100. The fear can be kept low (the trouble of damaging the harness can be drastically reduced), and the reliability is improved.

[Command transmission from main control board 409 to peripheral control board 750]
FIG. 56 is a time chart showing the on / off timing of each signal (SEL, WR, D0 to D3) in command transmission from the main control board 409 to the peripheral control board 750 (sub control board) in the present embodiment. A main CPU (main control means for performing game control) arranged on the main control board 409 is configured to perform a timer interrupt in response to a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined time (in this embodiment, for example, 1.49 ms). Execute the processing routine. Command transmission by the main CPU is executed as one of a series of processes in the timer interrupt processing routine. The “interrupt cycle” shown in FIG. 56 is the timing of a timer interrupt that occurs in the main CPU.

  Command data transmitted from the main control board 409 to the peripheral control board 750 is composed of 4 nibbles (1 nibble = 4 bits) and 1 packet. More specifically, the status (status part in one command) is composed of 1 byte (** H format), and the mode (mode part in 1 command) is composed of 1 byte (** H format). Then the size is 2 bytes. Further, it is recognized by the sub CPU of the peripheral control board 750 (sub control means for performing control processing related to effects) as one command in the status and mode. As shown in FIG. 56, from the main control board 409 to the peripheral control board 750, the upper 4 bits of the status, the lower 4 bits of the status, the upper 4 bits of the mode, and the lower 4 bits of the mode by 4 bits D0 to D3 Are output in the order.

  The SEL signal is turned on by the main control board 409 from the start to the end of command transmission. In the sub CPU, an INT2 interrupt is generated at the falling edge of the SEL signal from on to off, and the SEL interrupt processing is executed. The setting for generating the INT2 interrupt at the falling edge of the SEL signal from on to off is set in an initial setting process performed by the sub CPU when the power is turned on.

  The WR signal is a signal corresponding to the strobe signal according to claim 1. The WR signal is turned on when the main control board 409 outputs command data to the command data D0 to D3. In FIG. 56, time T0 is the time from the output of the first 4 bits of command data to the rise of the SEL signal and the WR signal. The time T1 is the time from the 4-bit output of the command data transmitted for the second time to the rise of the WR signal. Time T2 is the ON time of the WR signal. The ON time of the WR signal is set to a time sufficient for the sub CPU to capture the command data D0 to D3. The ON time of the WR signal is approximately 22 μs, for example, and is preset and stored in the main CPU and sub CPU. In the sub CPU, an INT1 interrupt is generated when the WR signal rises from OFF to ON, and a command reception interrupt process is executed. Note that the setting for generating the INT1 interrupt at the rise of the WR signal from OFF to ON is set in an initial setting process performed by the sub CPU when the power is turned on. Time T4 is a holding time of the OFF state of the SEL signal and the WR signal. As shown in FIG. 56, in this embodiment, one command (2 bytes) is transmitted by eight timer interruptions (1.49 ms × 8). However, it is not limited to the embodiment, and 4 bits may be transmitted for each timer interrupt.

[Main CPU / Command output processing]
57 to 58 are flowcharts of command output processing executed by the main CPU of the main control board 409. The command output process is executed as one of a series of processes in a timer interrupt process routine executed in response to a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 1.49 ms).

  When starting the command output process, the main CPU first determines whether or not the command flag is “1 (command present)” (step S10). The command flag is a flag for identifying whether or not a command to be transmitted to the sub CPU is prepared. In each process related to a game (not shown), command data to be transmitted according to the game state is stored in the STTS area ( When set in the status area and the MODE area (mode area), “1 (with command)” is set. If the command flag is not “1 (with command)”, that is, if there is no command data to be transmitted, the main CPU determines that step S10 is NO, exits the command output process, and returns to the timer interrupt process routine. To do.

  On the other hand, if the command flag is “1 (command exists)”, that is, if there is command data to be transmitted, the main CPU determines YES in step S10, proceeds to step S11, and sets the interrupt counter N. It is determined whether or not the value is 0 (step S11). Here, the interrupt number counter N is a counter that is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to 7, and the value is updated by +1 every time the command output process is substantially executed. However, when the value of the interrupt counter N is 7, it is reset to 0. It is assumed that the initial value of the interrupt count counter N is 0. If the value of the interrupt counter N is 0, that is, if it is the first timer interrupt in FIG. 56, the main CPU determines YES in step S11 and proceeds to step S12.

  The main CPU increments the value of the interrupt counter N by 1 (step S12), reads the upper 4 bits of the STTS area of the command data (step S13), and corresponds the read 4-bit data to the output ports (D0 to D3). (Step S14), the NOP instruction (do nothing) is executed three times (step S15), the SEL signal output port is turned on (step S16), and the WR signal output port is turned on (step S15). The process proceeds to step S17) and step S18. The processing time for executing the NOP instruction three times corresponds to the time T0 in FIG.

  In step S18, the main CPU sets a wait value corresponding to the ON time of the WR signal (22 μs in this embodiment) in the timer register (step S18), and proceeds to step S19 to set the wait value in the timer register. 1 (step S19), it is determined whether or not the wait value of the timer register has reached 0 (step S20). If the wait value of the timer register has not reached 0, the main CPU determines NO in step S20 and returns to step S19. Hereinafter, the process of determining step S19 and step S20 as NO is repeated until the wait value of the timer register becomes zero. Then, when the wait value of the timer register reaches 0, it means that the ON time of the WR signal has elapsed, it is determined YES in Step S20, the WR signal output port is turned OFF (Step S21), and the command output processing is performed. Exit and return to the timer interrupt processing routine. Thus, the WR signal is turned on for the on time corresponding to time T2 in FIG.

  Thereafter, in the command output process performed in response to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, step S10 is determined to be YES, and step S11 is determined to be NO based on the value 1 of the updated interrupt number counter N. Then, it is determined as YES whether the value of the interrupt counter N in step S22 is 1, that is, whether it is the second timer interrupt in FIG. 56, and the process proceeds to step S23. The main CPU increments the value of the interrupt number counter N by 1 (step S23). In this case, the value of the interrupt number counter N becomes 2. Next, the SEL signal output port is turned on (step S24), the WR signal output port is turned off (step S25), the command output process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine. That is, in this interruption cycle, the ON state of the SEL signal and the OFF state of the WR signal are maintained.

  Thereafter, in the command output process performed in response to the next timer interrupt, step S10 is determined as YES, and step S11 is determined as NO based on the updated value 2 of the interrupt counter N. Step S22 is determined as NO, and it is determined as YES whether or not the value of the interrupt counter N in step S26 is 2, that is, whether or not it is the third timer interrupt in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S27. The main CPU increments the value of the interrupt counter N by 1 (step S27). In this case, the value of the interrupt counter N is 3. Next, the lower 4 bits of the STTS area of the command data are read (step S28), the read 4-bit data is output from the output port (corresponding to D0 to D3) (step S29), and a NOP instruction (nothing is executed) ) Is executed three times (step S30), the WR signal output port is turned on (step S31), and the process proceeds to step S18. Note that the processing time for executing the NOP instruction three times corresponds to time T1 in FIG.

  Thereafter, in the same manner as described above, the processing of step S18 to step S21 is performed, the command output processing is exited, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing routine. Therefore, after the process of turning on the WR signal, the timer waits for an on time (22 μs) and turns off the WR signal. As a result, as shown in FIG. 56, the WR signal is turned on for the on time corresponding to time T2 with respect to the output of the lower 4 bits of the STTS area of the command data.

  Thereafter, in the command output process performed in response to the next timer interrupt, step S10 is determined to be YES, and step S11 is determined to be NO based on the updated value 3 of the interrupt counter N. Step S22 is determined as NO, step S26 is determined as NO, whether the value of the interrupt number counter N in step S32 is 4 is determined as NO, and the value of the interrupt number counter N in step S35 Is determined as NO, whether the value of the interrupt number counter N in step S38 is determined as NO, the process proceeds to step S23, and the value of the interrupt number counter N is incremented by +1. In this case, the value of the interrupt number counter N is 4. Next, the SEL signal output port is turned on (step S24), the WR signal output port is turned off (step S25), the command output process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine.

  Thereafter, in the command output processing performed in response to the next timer interrupt, step S10 is determined as YES, and step S11 is determined as NO based on the updated value 4 of the interrupt counter N. Then, step S22 is determined as NO, step S26 is determined as NO, it is determined as YES whether the value of the interrupt number counter N in step S32 is 4, and the process proceeds to step S33. The main CPU increments the value of the interrupt number counter N by 1 (step S33). In this case, the value of the interrupt number counter N is 5. Next, the upper 4 bits of the MODE area of the command data are read (step S34), and the read 4-bit data is output from the output port (corresponding to D0 to D3) (step S29), and a NOP instruction (nothing is executed) ) Is executed three times (step S30), the WR signal output port is turned on (step S31), and the process proceeds to step S18.

  Thereafter, in the same manner as described above, the processing of step S18 to step S21 is performed, the command output processing is exited, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing routine. Therefore, after the process of turning on the WR signal, the timer waits for an on time (22 μs) and turns off the WR signal. As a result, as shown in FIG. 56, the WR signal is turned on for the on time corresponding to time T2 with respect to the output of the upper 4 bits of the MODE area of the command data.

  Thereafter, in the command output process performed in response to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, step S10 is determined to be YES, and step S11 is determined to be NO based on the updated value 5 of the interrupt counter N. Step S22 is determined as NO, Step S26 is determined as NO, Step S32 is determined as NO, Step S35 is determined as NO, Step S38 is determined as NO, the process proceeds to Step S23, and the interrupt counter The value of N is incremented by 1 (step S23). In this case, the value of the interrupt counter N is 6. Next, the SEL signal output port is turned on (step S24), the WR signal output port is turned off (step S25), the command output process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine.

  Thereafter, in the command output process performed in response to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, step S10 is determined as YES, and step S11 is determined as NO based on the updated number of interrupt counter N. Step S22 is determined as NO, step S26 is determined as NO, step S32 is determined as NO, whether or not the value of the interrupt counter N in step S35 is 6 is determined as YES, and step S36 is determined. Proceed to The main CPU increments the value of the interrupt number counter N by 1 (step S36). In this case, the value of the interrupt number counter N becomes 7. Next, the lower 4 bits of the MODE area of the command data are read (step S37), the read 4-bit data is output from the output port (corresponding to D0 to D3) (step S29), and the NOP instruction (nothing is executed) ) Is executed three times (step S30), the WR signal output port is turned on (step S31), and the process proceeds to step S18.

  Thereafter, in the same manner as described above, the processing of step S18 to step S21 is performed, the command output processing is exited, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing routine. Therefore, after the process of turning on the WR signal, the timer waits for an on time (22 μs) and turns off the WR signal. As a result, as shown in FIG. 56, the WR signal is turned on for the on time corresponding to time T2 with respect to the output of the lower 4 bits of the MODE area of the command data.

  Thereafter, in the command output process performed in response to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, step S10 is determined as YES, and step S11 is determined as NO based on the value 7 of the updated interrupt counter N. Step S22 is determined as NO, Step S26 is determined as NO, Step S32 is determined as NO, Step S35 is determined as NO, Step S38 is determined as YES, the process proceeds to Step S39, and the interrupt counter N is set to 0 (step S39). Next, in response to the completion of the output of one command, the command flag is cleared to 0 (step S40), the output port of the SEL signal is turned off (step S41), the command output processing is exited, and the timer interrupt processing routine is entered. Return. Therefore, until the next timer interrupt is generated, the SEL signal and the WR signal are kept off for a time corresponding to time T4 as shown in FIG.

[Sub CPU / SEL interrupt processing]
The INT2 interrupt is generated in the sub CPU due to the fall of the SEL signal from on to off, and the SEL interrupt processing is executed. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the SEL interrupt process executed by the sub CPU of the peripheral control board 750 (sub control board). When the sub CPU starts the SEL interrupt process, the buffer counter value for designating the storage area for the acquired command data is rounded down to a multiple of 4 (step A50), and the process exits the SEL interrupt process. Return to the main routine. For example, if the value of the buffer counter before performing Step A50 is any one of 0, 1, 2, and 3, the value of the buffer counter becomes 0 after executing Step A50. For example, when the value of the buffer counter before performing Step A50 is any one of 4, 5, 6, and 7, the value of the buffer counter becomes 4 after executing Step A50. Note that the buffer counter value is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on.

[Sub CPU / command reception interrupt processing]
When the WR signal rises from OFF to ON, an INT1 interrupt is generated in the sub CPU, and a command reception interrupt process is executed. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU of the peripheral control board 750 (sub control board). When starting the command reception interrupt process, the sub CPU first sets the interrupt prohibition (step A60). For this reason, INT1 interrupt is prohibited. Next, the sub CPU determines whether or not the SEL signal is on (step A61). If the SEL signal is not on, that is, if the INT1 interrupt is generated in the sub CPU due to the rise of the WR signal from off to on, and the SEL signal is off, step A61 is determined as NO, In step A70, the interrupt prohibition setting is canceled (step A70), the SEL interrupt process is exited, and the process returns to the main routine (not shown). In this case, since the prohibition of the INT1 interrupt is canceled, the INT1 interrupt can be performed.

  On the other hand, when the SEL signal is on, that is, when the INT1 interrupt is generated in the sub CPU due to the rise of the WR signal from off to on, the SEL signal is on as shown in FIG. The sub CPU determines that step A61 is YES and proceeds to step A62. The sub CPU saves the contents stored in the register (step A62), acquires the command data D0 to D3 (4-bit data) in the reception buffer (step A63), and acquires the acquired command data in the value of the buffer counter. (Step A64). For example, when the value of the buffer counter is 0, the upper 4 bits of the acquired status are stored in the storage area designated by the value 0 of the buffer counter.

  Next, the sub CPU increments the value of the buffer counter by 1 (step A65). In this case, the value of the buffer counter is 1. Next, the sub CPU proceeds to step A66, sets a wait value corresponding to the ON time of the WR signal (22 μs in this embodiment) in the timer register (step A66), and proceeds to step A67 to wait for the wait value of the timer register. Is decremented by 1 (step A67), and it is determined whether or not the wait value of the timer register has reached 0 (step A68). If the wait value of the timer register has not reached 0, the sub CPU determines NO in step A68 and returns to step A67. Thereafter, the process of determining NO at step A67 and step A68 is repeated until the wait value of the timer register becomes zero. When the wait value of the timer register reaches 0, the ON time of the WR signal has been timed, step A68 is determined to be YES, and the stored contents of the register saved in step A69 are restored. (Step A69), the interrupt prohibition setting is canceled in step A70 (step A70), the SEL interrupt process is exited, and the process returns to the main routine (process before INT1 interrupt) (not shown). Therefore, since the prohibition of INT1 interrupt is canceled, INT1 interrupt becomes possible.

  Note that the sub CPU can select a control method called "high-speed interrupt" for external interrupts with software initial settings. If "high-speed interrupt" is selected in advance, the interrupt control status Transition at high speed. When command data is fetched (acquired and stored) in the interrupt control process using this “high-speed interrupt”, the command has already been fetched on the sub control board before the WR signal is turned off. become. On the other hand, for example, when noise enters the WR signal line while the WR signal is on, the WR signal is instantaneously turned off. Since the WR signal returns to the ON state again when the noise disappears, another interrupt is generated in the sub control board, and the command data is fetched again in the interrupt control process, and the same command is duplicated. This causes a problem that the taken-in will occur. The present invention sets a “high-speed interrupt” for an external interrupt in the sub CPU, executes a “high-speed interrupt” at the rising (or falling) of an externally applied WR signal, This makes it possible to solve the above-described problems that have been manifested when command data is fetched (acquired and stored) in the interrupt control process.

  That is, as can be understood from the above description, the sub CPU obtains the command data D0 to D3 (4-bit data) in step A63 and step A64, and stores the command data specified by the value of the buffer counter. Even after storing in the area, the command reception interrupt processing is continued until the WR signal falls, that is, until the ON time (wait value) of the WR signal set in the timer register is counted (steps A67 and A67). When step A68 is determined as NO and the process returns to step A67), when the ON time of the WR signal is timed (when step A68 is determined as YES), the prohibition of INT1 interrupt is canceled (step A70). Therefore, while the WR signal is on, another INT1 interrupt is prohibited in the command reception interrupt process. Therefore, after storing the acquired command data in the storage area, even if the WR signal falls instantaneously due to noise or the like and then rises again, INT1 interrupt does not occur, and duplicate capture of the same command due to noise is not caused. Can be prevented.

  Further, when a SEL signal (select signal) is input (YES at step A61), command fetch processing (step A63 to step A64) is executed, while when a select signal is not input (step A61). NO), the interrupt prohibition setting is canceled (step A70), and the interrupt processing is terminated (since the command is not captured), so a normal WR signal (strobe signal) If an erroneous INT1 interrupt occurs due to noise rather than by, a command capture process is not executed only by the WR signal (strobe signal), and erroneous command capture can be prevented. Further, since the ON time (22 μs) of the WR signal is a time sufficient for the sub CPU to capture the command, the command can be reliably captured.

  Thereafter, in the command reception interrupt process performed in response to the next INT1 interrupt, the above-described step A60 and step A61 are determined to be YES under the condition that the value of the buffer counter is 1, step A62 to step By performing the processing up to A70 (referred to as a normal routine), as shown in FIG. 56, the lower 4 bits of the status are acquired as command data (step A63), and the lower 4 bits of the acquired status are stored in the buffer counter. It is stored in the storage area specified by the value 1 (step A64). Then, the value of the buffer counter is incremented by 1 to 2 (step A65). Of course, while the WR signal is on, another INT1 interrupt is prohibited in the command reception interrupt process.

  In the command reception interrupt process performed in response to the next INT1 interrupt, the above-described step A60 and step A61 are determined to be YES under the condition that the value of the buffer counter is 2, and steps A62 to By performing the processing up to step A70 (referred to as a normal routine), as shown in FIG. 56, the upper 4 bits of the mode are acquired as command data (step A63), and the upper 4 bits of the acquired mode are stored in the buffer counter. Is stored in the storage area designated by the value 2 (step A64). Then, the value of the buffer counter is incremented by 1 to 3 (step A65). Of course, while the WR signal is on, another INT1 interrupt is prohibited in the command reception interrupt process.

  Further, in the command reception interrupt process performed in response to the next INT1 interrupt, the above-described Step A60 and Step A61 are determined as YES under the condition that the value of the buffer counter is 3, Steps A62 to By performing the process up to step A70 (referred to as a normal routine), as shown in FIG. 56, the lower 4 bits of the mode are acquired as command data (step A63), and the lower 4 bits of the acquired mode are stored in the buffer counter. Is stored in the storage area designated by the value 3 (step A64). Then, the value of the buffer counter is incremented by 1 to 4 (step A65). Of course, while the WR signal is on, another INT1 interrupt is prohibited in the command reception interrupt process.

  By performing a total of four command reception interrupt processes performed in response to the occurrence of the four INT1 interrupts described above, the storage buffer (0), the storage buffer (1), the storage buffer (2), and the storage buffer (3 ), The upper 4 bits of the status, the lower 4 bits of the status, the upper 4 bits of the mode, and the lower 4 bits of the mode are stored, and the transfer of one command is completed in the sub-control board. According to the timing of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, after the WR signal corresponding to the upper 4 bits of the mode falls from on to off, the SEL signal falls from on to off. ing. When the SEL signal falls from on to off, the above-described SEL interrupt processing is executed, and the value of the buffer counter is rounded down to a multiple of 4 (see FIG. 59). In this case, the value of the buffer counter is 4. Then, the sub CPU determines whether or not the value of the buffer counter is 4 in a control process for performing an effect according to a command (not shown), and the value of the buffer counter (current value is 4) is 4. If it is determined, the data is read from the storage buffer (0) to the storage buffer (3), control is performed to produce an effect according to the read command, and the value of the buffer counter is returned to 0. .

[Winning line for winning judgment of reels stopped]
Next, the number of effective lines and the number of effective lines corresponding to the number of 3 bets will be specifically described. A transparent plate 214a is disposed in front of the opening 401 of the case member 400 shown in FIG. 3, and the player can visually recognize nine symbols on the left, middle, and right three reels through the transparent plate 214a.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a winning line visually recognized through the transparent plate 214a. Each reel has a lower display position, a middle display position, and an upper display position. The active lines corresponding to 3 bets are 5 lines L1 to L5 shown in FIG.

L1 as the above-mentioned effective line is an upper horizontal effective line (upper horizontal line) that is "upper stage-upper stage-upper stage" connecting the upper stage position of the left reel, the upper stage position of the middle reel, and the upper stage position of the right reel. is there. L2 is a middle horizontal effective line (middle horizontal line) that is a "middle stage-middle stage-middle stage" connecting the middle stage position of the left reel, the middle stage position of the middle reel, and the middle stage position of the right reel. L3 is it connects the lower position the lower position and the right reel middle and lower position of the left reel reel is "lower - lower - lower" and becomes lower stage horizontal active line (Bottom horizontal line). L4 is a lower right effective line (lower right line) that is an "upper stage-middle stage-lower stage" connecting the upper stage position of the left reel, the middle stage position of the middle reel, and the lower stage position of the right reel. L5 is an effective line (upward to the right) that becomes the “lower stage—middle stage—upper stage” that connects the lower stage position of the left reel, the middle stage position of the middle reel, and the upper stage position of the right reel.

  In addition, the activated winning line that is the target of the winning determination when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped is informed to the player by lighting. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination won in the internal lottery is aligned on the activated winning line, a winning is achieved.

[Design of each reel, design row]
As shown in FIG. 62, each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a series of symbols (a total of 21 symbols indicated by array numbers 1 to 21) formed by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. A reel band (symbol band) on which the symbol is marked is attached. FIG. 62 shows a state in which the symbol rows shown on the reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience.

  Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, and the opening 401 (also referred to as symbol display window, hereinafter symbol). It is arranged so that it can be visually recognized via the display window 401.

  62. As shown in FIG. 62, there are “7” symbol, “bell” symbol, “cherry” symbol, “watermelon” symbol, and “replay” symbol.

  The “7” symbol is colored “red 7” (corresponding to the arrangement number 19 of each of the reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c and the arrangement number 16 of the reel band 321b), and is painted “blue”. “Blue 7” design (corresponding to the arrangement numbers 12 and 8 of the reel bands 321a and 321c and the arrangement numbers 11 and 8 of the reel band 321b) and the “white 7” design (the arrangement of the reel bands 321a and 321c) filled in white No. 5 and the arrangement number 3 of the reel band 321b correspond). However, when “7 symbols (BB symbols)” is a winning combination as a result of the internal lottery, the symbol display window does not distinguish any of the above three types of “7”. Combinations can also appear.

  The “bell” symbol is the “red bell” symbol (corresponding to the arrangement number 20 of the reel band 321a, the arrangement numbers 20 and 17 of the reel band 321b, the arrangement number 21 of the reel band 321c), and the “blue bell” symbol (reel band 321c). 321a array number 13, reel band 321b array numbers 12 and 9, and reel band 321c array number 14), "white bell" design (reel band 321a array number 6, reel band 321b array number 4, There are three types) (corresponding to the arrangement number 7 of the reel band 321c).

  As shown in FIG. 62, the “red bell” symbol is placed near the “red 7” symbol, the “blue bell” symbol is placed near the “7” symbol, and the “white bell” symbol is It is arranged in the vicinity of the “White 7” symbol. Therefore, depending on whether the flag is established, if the stop operation is performed so that the “red 7” symbol appears on the effective line, which will be described later, the “red bell” can appear on the active line. If you stop the operation so that the symbol appears on the active line, you can apply for “Blue Bell” on the active line, and stop aiming so that the “White 7” symbol appears on the active line. By operating, it is possible to apply for “white bell” on the active line. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of slips (so-called number of pull-in frames) from the stop operation to the stop of the reel is 4 frames (4 symbols).

  The “cherry” symbol is a symbol shaped like a cherry (for example, the arrangement number 9 of the reel band 321a), and the “replay” symbol is a symbol in which the letters “RP” are written (for example, a reel band). The “watermelon” design is a design shaped like a watermelon (for example, the sequence number 1 of the reel band 321a).

  Here, an outline of the game by the slot machine 1 will be described. The game by the slot machine 1 is an internal lottery in which at least one lottery flag is extracted from a plurality of lottery flags based on the player operating the start lever 210 with the number of medals multiplied. A random number lottery is performed and rotation of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c is started. Thereafter, when the player performs a stop operation on the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b and 301c are controlled to stop according to the result of the internal lottery and the stop operation (rotation stop control means). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of the symbols shown on the active line, and a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the winning combination shown on the active line The right of replay (replay) is granted as a prize (prize grant means).

  The above is the description of the effective line of the spinning cylinder game machine described in the present embodiment, but the effective line is not limited to the above.

[Frame member]
From the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. The three positions where the symbols are displayed are referred to as the upper, middle, and lower stages from the top.

  From the above, it is possible to display “number of stages × number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 by “the number of stages (3) × the number of reels (3)”.

  Various lamps are provided on the left side of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be unified as the display panel 501 below) on the left side when viewed from the symbol display window 401. Among them, “BET1”, “BET2 , “BET 3” is a BET lamp (bet lamp) 614.

  In the present embodiment, the so-called three-sheet exclusive machine is effective only in the case of “BET3”, but the arrangement (effective line) that is effective may be determined according to the number of bets.

  A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one active line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if the respective symbols are not arranged on one active line, the predetermined winning combination It is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to is displayed. In such a case, it is determined that a disparate combination pattern is displayed.

  The display panel 501 is provided with lamps and LEDs that can be lit (or flashed) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1. From the top of the figure, these lamps are an error lamp 604 on which the characters “ERR” are drawn, a replay lamp 606 on which characters “REP” are drawn, which is located immediately below the BET lamp 614, and “STR”. A start lamp 608 with the letters “INS”, a medal IN lamp 610 with the letters “INS”, and a payout number display LED 612 having two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs. In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the cumulative payout number of medals in a bonus game, etc., and counting the bonus game are provided separately. Also good.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or flashes) when any trouble or failure occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and indicates that a trouble or the like is currently occurring. Have a role to inform.

  The replay lamp 606 has a role of notifying the player that a game can be replayed (a game can be played again without a new medal) when the game result is a replay (described later).

  The start lamp 608 starts to light (or flash) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has a role of prompting the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation).

  The medal IN lamp 610 continues to light (or blink) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet), thereby having a role of prompting the player to place a bet.

  The payout number display LED 612 has a role of notifying the player of the number of medals paid out by displaying the number of payouts (number of medals to be paid out) when there is a payout of medals accompanying the game result.

[Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, the winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will be specifically described. The combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is preferably written on the display panel 501 or the like as a payout table for the player (a simple description of the gaming benefits of each winning combination).

  As described above, the reels 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively. The order of symbols, the types of symbols, etc. are different for each reel band. For example, a combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is displayed in the symbol display window 401 in duplicate. There is nothing. In addition, as long as the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is not displayed in the symbol display window 401, the order of symbols and the types of symbols of several reel bands may be the same.

  Then, whether or not a symbol combination mode corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed based on display contents (a symbol combination mode) displayed in the symbol display window 401 when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. Is judged. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination mode corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the active lines corresponding to the 3-bet number in the symbol display window 401.

  In the following, the case where the combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the active lines is the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is called the winning combination symbol). It is said that the combination is complete or the winning symbol is complete. Then, when the winning combination symbols are arranged on the active line, a prize is awarded, and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is awarded. In addition, the winning combination in the internal lottery is called the winning combination, and the combination on the active line is called the winning combination. In order for any of the winning combinations to win, It is necessary to win.

  The symbol of slot machine 1 includes “red 7 symbol”, “blue 7 symbol”, “white 7 symbol”, “red bell”, “blue bell”, “white bell”, “cherry symbol”, “watermelon symbol”. As described above, there is a “replay symbol”, among which “red 7 symbol”, “white 7 symbol”, “blue 7 symbol”, “white bell symbol”, “red bell”, “ “Blue Bell” is more prominent and distinguishable than other symbols (more specifically, “White Bell”, “Red 7 Bell” and “Blue 7 Bell” are different from other symbols. Although not easily noticeable, it is easy to identify by the fact that the symbols are arranged in the vicinity of “red 7 symbol”, “white 7 symbol”, and “blue 7 symbol”). Here, the ease of identification refers to the level at which the player can easily identify the symbol including the reel being rotated and the reel being stopped. Each of these symbols is only one on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, and in addition, it is easy to visually recognize colors. As a result, even during reel rotation, “Red 7 Symbol”, “Blue 7 Symbol”, “White 7 Symbol”, “Red Bell”, “Blue Bell”, “White Bell”, “Cherry Symbol”, It is possible to perform a stop operation with a desired symbol out of “watermelon symbol” and “replay symbol”.

  These symbols are merely symbolic symbols (one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but they become a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. . That is, a predetermined game privilege is given.

[Big Bonus, Regular Bonus]
As a combination mode of symbols (7 symbols) corresponding to the big bonus (hereinafter referred to as BB), a combination of “red 7 symbol”, “blue 7 symbol”, “white 7 symbol”, specifically, the same color symbol When 27 combinations as the first symbol combination including 3 combinations are determined in advance and the result of the internal lottery is BB, any of these 27 types of combinations is effective. Can be aligned on the line. The 27 combinations are 3 colors and 3 designs (left, middle, right), so there are 27 to the 3rd power of 3. That is, combinations of completely different colors are included. The 27 combinations correspond to one flag common to all. That is, although only one flag is used as the BB flag, when this one BB flag is won, any of the 27 “7” combinations can be aligned on the active line.

  In other words, although there is one BB flag internally, when the one BB flag is established, the colors are different, but according to “red 7 symbol”, “blue 7 symbol”, “white 7 symbol” Any of the 27 symbol combinations can be shown on the active line.

  When the seven symbol combinations are complete, a gaming bonus called a big bonus game (hereinafter referred to as a BB game) is awarded (bonus game execution means). In this BB game, a plurality of games where medals can be easily acquired are concentrated. This is continuously executed until a prescribed number of medals (for example, 300) are paid out. When the paid-out medals reach the prescribed number (or may exceed the prescribed number), the BB game ends.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when 7 symbol combinations are prepared (the game in which 7 symbol combinations are prepared), medals are not awarded. That is, having the BB symbol combination has a role as an opportunity to shift to the BB game. In addition, since seven symbols are arranged on each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (see FIG. 62), a stop operation (reel stop button 211a, Unless the operation of pressing 211b and 211c) is performed, the symbol combinations of BB cannot be aligned. In this way, the stop operation aiming at the target symbol (7 symbols in this example), that is, “to push”, means that the skill (or technology or player) in the revolving type gaming machine represented by the slot machine 1 This is one of the operations that must be performed intentionally).

  Therefore, if the player's skill to “push” is high (mainly a player who is highly skilled in the game, such as a player who is highly skilled in the game), the position aimed at the target symbol (for example, in the symbol display window 401) ) Can be displayed (stopped) easily. On the other hand, if the player's skill to “push” is low (mainly an inexperienced player, such as a player with a low level of game skill), the position aimed at the target symbol (for example, in the symbol display window 401) ) Is not easy to display (stop) (can be said to be difficult).

  In addition, although a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB) in which the number of medals that can be awarded to a player is smaller than that of a big bonus is generally provided, the description of RB is omitted in this embodiment.

[bell]
The winning combination indicated by the bell (small role 1-27) includes a combination of “red bell symbol”, “blue bell symbol”, “white bell symbol” as a combination mode of the corresponding symbol (bell symbol), specifically Specifically, 27 combinations as the second symbol combination including three combinations with the same color symbol are determined in advance, and when the result of the internal lottery is “bell”, these 27 types of symbols Of the combinations, any combination can be aligned on the effective line. The 27 combinations are 3 colors and 3 designs (left, middle, right), so there are 27 to the 3rd power of 3. That is, combinations of completely different colors are included. However, these 27 combinations are all different flags. Accordingly, only the established flags among the 27 flags can be aligned on the active line. The “red bell design”, “blue bell design”, and “white bell design” are all colors that can be recognized as bells (for example, yellow), but the flag character that the bell character is holding. The “red bell design”, “blue bell design”, and “white bell design” are internally distinguished by the number.

  That is, unlike the BB flag, there are 27 different small combination flags internally (small combination 1 to small combination 27). Internally, these 27 flags are completely different flags, so the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol combinations corresponding to the selected flag (any of the small roles 1 to 27) are aligned on the effective line. Only in the case where the winning combination has been made, the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning flag are aligned on the active line. In other words, each of the 27 flags is assigned a unique timing for arranging the symbol combinations for the corresponding small combinations on the active line. Note that even if the stop operation is performed at any timing, it coincides with any timing corresponding to the 27 flags. In other words, if all 27 flags are established, the symbol combinations for the small combinations corresponding to any one of the 27 flags are aligned on the active line. However, although there are 27 small role flags internally, if the player is conscious that 27 types of roles actually exist, the game content becomes complicated and difficult to understand. Therefore, in spite of the fact that there are 27 types of small roles internally, the combination of the same types of symbols (bell symbols) so as to appear to be the same on the appearance causes the game content to become complicated. It becomes possible to provide a new playability without.

  Note that “the timing at which the symbol combinations for the small role corresponding to the winning flag are aligned on the active line” means that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning flag (established flag) is determined by reel stop control (reel pull-in control). This is a time width that can be drawn into the display window 401. In the present embodiment, for example, when it is desired to stop the arrangement number 20 as the winning combination symbol on the upper stage of the left reel 321a, the reel is rotated in the direction of rotation of the reel (in the order of the arrangement number from the smallest to the largest). If a stop operation is performed when a symbol with an array element number (array numbers 17 to 20) larger than the array element number 16 before 4 symbols is on the upper stage of the left reel 321a, the array element number 20 is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 321a. Therefore, “the unique timing for the symbol combinations for the corresponding small roles being aligned on the effective line” means that the symbol combinations for the corresponding small roles can be drawn into the symbol display window 401 by the reel stop control. This is the time span unique to the corresponding small role.

  Here, for the left reel 321a, only “red bell” is disposed between the front and rear symbols including “red bell”, and “blue bell” is disposed between the front and rear symbols including “blue bell”. Only “white bell” is arranged between the front and rear seven symbols including “white bell”. For example, assuming that SEQ ID NOS: 14 to 20 are the first zone, SEQ ID NOS: 7 to 13 are the second zone, and SEQ ID NOs: 21 to 6 are the third zone, the “red bell” symbol is placed only in the first zone, The “bell” symbol is placed only in the second zone, and the “white bell” symbol is placed only in the third zone. Accordingly, only one type of “red bell”, “blue bell”, and “white bell” always appears on the active line depending on the timing of the stop operation, and two or more types of bell symbols are simultaneously displayed. It cannot appear on the active line.

  For the middle reel 321a, only “red bell” is arranged between the five front and rear symbols including “red bell”, and only “blue bell” is disposed between the five front and rear symbols including “blue bell”. Are arranged, and only the “white bell” is arranged between the five front and rear symbols including the “white bell”. Accordingly, only one type of “red bell”, “blue bell”, and “white bell” always appears on the active line depending on the timing of the stop operation, and two or more types of bell symbols are simultaneously displayed. It cannot appear on the active line.

  Further, with respect to the right reel 321c, only “red bell” is arranged between the front and rear seven symbols including “red bell”, and only “blue bell” is disposed between the front and rear seven symbols including “blue bell”. Are arranged, and only the “white bell” is arranged between the front and rear seven symbols including the “white bell”. Accordingly, only one type of “red bell”, “blue bell”, and “white bell” always appears on the active line depending on the timing of the stop operation, and two or more types of bell symbols are simultaneously displayed. It cannot appear on the active line.

  By the way, when the bell symbols are aligned, a predetermined number of medals are paid out (one in this embodiment). The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. That is, when the bell symbols are aligned, a gaming privilege of paying out one medal is given. The smaller the number of medals to be paid out when the bell symbols are arranged, the better. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number is set as one minimum unit. This is because, as will be described later, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the winning combination as a bell is handled in the same way as a loss that is not valuable to a player like the conventional slot machine (different from the loss of this embodiment). This is because it is positioned like a loss in a conventional slot machine.

[Replay]
For the winning combination of replay, “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” is determined in advance as a combination mode of corresponding symbols (replay symbols).

  When the replay symbols are ready, a game privilege called a replay game is given. In this replay game, it means that a game to be executed as the next game can be executed as a replay without newly inserting medals or performing a betting operation. In this case, the number of effective lines is the same as the number of effective lines of the game with replay symbols.

  In addition, when the replay symbols are arranged, no medal is given, and it has a role as an opportunity to shift to the replay game. A feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to spend a new medal (add a new medal) in the next game instead of not paying out a medal. In addition, since replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, it can be said that, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency increases, there is very little disadvantage to the hole. Therefore, the slot machine 1 has a probability of winning about once in seven times (details will be described later). As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range to some extent. In other words, the winning role of replay can be given a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption in the game progression.

  Further, by arranging the replay symbols evenly on each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the replay symbols can be aligned without the need for pressing. Specifically, on the left reel and the right reel, there are two or three other symbols (a symbol of a different type from the replay symbol) arranged between the replay symbol and the replay symbol. In the middle reel, three or four other symbols are arranged between the replay symbol and the replay symbol.

[Cherry]
A corresponding symbol (cherry symbol) is determined in advance for the winning combination of cherry. As for the cherry symbol, if there is one cherry symbol (in this example, only the left reel 301a), such as “cherry symbol-ANY-ANY”, it is considered that the cherry symbol is aligned. Here, “ANY” indicates that any symbol may be used. When the cherry symbols are arranged, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of medals are paid out in the game. That is, when the cherry symbols are arranged, a gaming privilege of paying out four medals is given. Note that the cherry symbols are arranged uniformly on the left reel 301a, so that they can be aligned without the need for pressing.

  Therefore, it is not determined that the cherry symbols are arranged according to the combination of symbols in a state where all the reels are stopped, but only for at least one reel, the symbols displayed on the active line when the reels are stopped. It can be said that it is determined that they are aligned. However, medals are paid out after all reels are stopped. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “at least one reel” described above is the right reel 301c.

  By the way, as with the bell described above, cherry has a role of preventing the player from consuming a large amount of medals in the progress of the game, and the winning probability is kept lower than replay. ing. Accordingly, the cherry symbols are arranged uniformly on the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (particularly the right reel 301c) as in the case of the replay symbols described above (in this case, the cherry symbols are arranged between the cherry symbols and the cherry symbols). It is no problem if the cherry symbols can be aligned without the need for a large number of other symbols). The relationship between the arrangement of symbols and the necessity of pressing will be described in the reel stop process described later.

[watermelon]
For the winning combination of watermelon, a corresponding symbol (watermelon symbol) is determined in advance. In addition, regarding the watermelon symbol, when the combination of “watermelon symbol-7 symbol-watermelon symbol” is aligned on the effective line, it is considered that the watermelon symbol is aligned. When the watermelon symbols are ready, a predetermined number (for example, 8) of medals are paid out in the game. That is, when the watermelon symbols are aligned, a gaming privilege of paying out 8 medals is given. The watermelon symbols (7 symbols for the middle reel 301b) are arranged uniformly on the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, so that they can be aligned without having to be pressed. Specifically, in the left reel and the right reel, there are 2 to 6 other symbols (which are different from the watermelon symbol) arranged between the watermelon symbol and the watermelon symbol. In the reel, there are two or four other symbols arranged between 7 symbols and 7 symbols.

  Further, since both the cherry and the watermelon described above are winning combinations corresponding to the gaming privilege of paying out medals, these will be collectively referred to as “general combinations” as necessary. In addition, the bell is referred to as a “small role” for convenience.

  In the slot machine 1, cherry and watermelon have been described as general roles. However, in addition to these, general roles can also be provided. For example, different types of symbols from cherry symbols and watermelon symbols are provided, and the corresponding number of medals to be paid out (specified number) is differentiated from the above-mentioned general combination, or each reel 301a, 301b, 301c. It is also possible to reduce the number of symbols arranged in order to give a difficulty level as a winning combination symbol that needs to be promoted.

[Loose]
When it does not correspond to any of BB, bell (small roles 1-27), cherry, watermelon, and replay, it is lost. Then, in the game that is lost, no medal is given, and no change is made to the game after the next time. It can be said that the loser is a winning combination that does not give the player any game privilege in the game and the next and subsequent games. In the present embodiment, the probability of losing in a normal gaming state (that is, a state that is not a gaming state such as BB or RB) is extremely small (0.18% in this embodiment).

  The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination.

  By the way, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, a plurality of flags may be established in duplicate. The replay, small role (bell), and general role flags are not carried over after the next game, but the BB flag is carried over after the next game if it cannot be aligned on the active line. That is, there are cases where a plurality of flags overlap and are simultaneously established. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell, the symbol combination corresponding to the general role (cherry, watermelon), and the symbol combination corresponding to BB are arranged on the active line (priority stop control). means).

  Specifically, when the replay flag is established, if the player has stopped the symbol combination corresponding to the replay at a timing at which it can be stopped and displayed on the active line, the other flags (small role, general role, Regardless of whether BB) is established, the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay are aligned on the effective line. However, as described above, the symbol combinations corresponding to replay are symbols that can be aligned without the need to push the replay symbols, so when the replay flag is established, the symbol combination corresponding to replay is always the effective line. Even if the BB flag is established, the symbol combination corresponding to BB cannot be aligned on the effective line.

  In addition, when the replay flag is not established and the small role (bell) or general role flag is established, the symbol combination corresponding to the established small role (bell) or general role flag is stopped and displayed on the active line. If the player performs a stop operation at a possible timing, regardless of whether the BB flag is established, the symbol combination corresponding to the established small role (bell) or general role flag is aligned on the effective line; (In this embodiment, the small combination flag and the general combination flag are not established at the same time).

  However, as in the case of replay, the symbol combinations corresponding to general roles (cherry, watermelon) are symbols that can be aligned without the need for pressing as described above. The symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination are aligned on the effective line, and even if the BB flag is established, the symbol combination corresponding to BB cannot be aligned on the effective line.

  As described above, there are 27 small combinations (bells) internally, and the player performs a stop operation at a timing at which the combination of symbols corresponding to the established small combination (bell) can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. As long as the flag of BB is established, the symbol combinations corresponding to the established small combination (bell) are aligned on the effective line. In other words, when the player performs a stop operation at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the established small role (bell) cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line and the flag of BB is established, the symbol corresponding to BB The combinations are aligned on the effective line (special stop control means).

  In other words, the replay is arranged so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay symbols are always aligned on the active line as long as the replay flag is established. Therefore, if the replay flag is established, the combinations corresponding to the replay symbols are always aligned on the active line even if other flags are established in an overlapping manner. Similarly to the replay, the general combination is also arranged so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the general combination is always aligned on the effective line if the general combination is established.

  Further, if the combination of the small role (bell) and the flag of BB is established, only when the combination corresponding to the established small role (bell) cannot be aligned on the active line. , BB may be aligned on the effective line.

  Furthermore, when the result of the internal lottery is a loss, if no flag is established, the loss is displayed on the active line. If the flag is established, the symbol combination corresponding to the established flag is displayed. Can be aligned on the active line. Here, the flag that can be carried over after the next game is only the flag of BB (when the RB is provided, the flag of RB is also carried over), and in the present embodiment, the symbol corresponding to BB is the replay symbol. As with, the symbols are arranged so that they can be aligned without the need for pressing. Therefore, if the BB flag is established and the result of the internal lottery is lost, the symbol combinations corresponding to BB are always aligned on the effective line.

  Note that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and symbol combinations described above. In addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. In addition, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily provided all, and a necessary type of winning combination may be selected as appropriate.

[Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with a processing procedure on a control program executed on the main board 409 (mainly CPU 1110 or the like).

  FIG. 63 shows one processing procedure for one basic game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for the game start is executed. Especially when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices mentioned above, check the existence of backup data, and if backup data exists, return to the state before the power was turned off. Execute.

  In the next step S2, the multiplier is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, the MAX bet button 206 (or 1 bet button 205) is pressed. Then, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the BET process is executed until the multiplication of one game is determined and the start lever 210 can be operated. This step S2 corresponds to an example of the multiplier determining means described in the solving means.

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which has been in an operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery. Execute (random number lottery means). This internal lottery process is either in the stage before all reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start rotating in the next step S4 are in a stopped state (stopped by a player's stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of the lottery corresponds to any winning combination, the corresponding winning combination is allowed.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation process, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, the depressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are validated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying that is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c.

  In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamps are turned off in the order of acceptance, and rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is stopped. (Lottery stop control means) is executed.

  In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has been stopped, the display content displayed on the active line (the combination of symbols) and the above step A determination process for determining the winning combination is performed by checking what is permitted as a result of the internal lottery determined in S3.

  In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. Further, when the winning combination is BB, RB, or replay, granting is performed for various game benefits such as a change in game state or replay.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process), step S3 (internal lottery process), and step S4 (reel rotation process) are performed by the player as a series of operations. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described in detail.

[Startup process]
FIG. 64 specifically shows each process performed in the starting process.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the operation of the insertion of medals, the single bet button 205, and the MAX bet button 206 is awaited. If the MAX bet button 206 is operated or three medals are inserted, the determination in Step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S102. This determination is satisfied when a requirement corresponding to a MAX bet (for example, insertion of three medals, one operation of the MAX bet button 206, and three operations of the one bet button 205) is satisfied.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined, and the active line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in that case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 as long as the player does not perform a bet operation or medal insertion in step S101 or does not result in a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In the replay game, no new medal bet is required. This is automatically set to the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. Thereby, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, random numbers are extracted in response to the operation. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. As for the timing for extracting the random number at this time, an appropriate extraction timing should be set in the programming process, for example, immediately after the start lever 210 is operated or after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds). Can do.

  In step S107, as a flag process, it is determined (random number value collation) which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as an extracted random number value). In this determination, the extracted random number value is collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches or matches) to a predetermined winning combination random number value. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the flag corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is set to ON (= 1). The flag corresponding to the winning combination that is ON (= 1) at this time is referred to as the winning combination winning flag.

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table as a determination reference when collating the extracted random number value in the game, refer to a game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later. A hit value determination table in the game is determined. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag that is ON (= 1) in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. The game state flag includes a BB game flag. When the game state flag is in the OFF (= 0) state, the normal state flag is always set to the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and the loss flag is turned ON. Here, the winning flag or the lost flag (collectively referred to as the establishment flag) means that the winning symbol corresponding to the establishment flag can be aligned only when the corresponding establishment flag is ON. It will be. Therefore, when the lost flag corresponds to the established flag, none of the winning combination symbols can be arranged. It can also be said that the above-described steps S106 and S107 are random number lottery inside the slot machine 1, and in the following, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. The process from the random number extraction to the flag processing is a role lottery means.

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has expired (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S109. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain the rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) by the player is accepted. .

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collating the extracted random number value) is allowed as a winning combination corresponding to the game (hereinafter referred to as a corresponding winning combination). This means that a predetermined winning combination is won. Here, the result of the game in which the corresponding winning combination is permitted is reflected in the subsequent processes (reel stop process, determination process, payout process, etc.) as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery as the “establishment flag” described above. Will be.

  In the slot machine 1, a random value range (this is called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 65535 (2 16 = 65536 random values). In the slot machine 1, the random number value in the extraction range is 0 to 65535, but from 0 to 16383 (2 to the 14th power = 65536 random number values) or from 0 to 32767 (2 to the 15th power = 32768). Random number value). However, it is preferable to expand the extraction range of random numbers because the range of random number values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased by that amount, so that it is less likely that a specific random number value is biased and extracted.

  Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance. For example, there is no random value corresponding only to BB among the random values in the extraction range (0 to 65535). In other words, BB can be established only by overlapping with other winning combinations.

  FIG. 65 shows the number of winning combinations and lose values for the winning combination in the general state where the BB flag is not in the winning state and the inside where the BB flag is in the winning state (referred to as a lottery determination table). . Each of these is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like as a winning value determination table. Here, for BB, the winning combination value of BB and small roles 1 to 27 is a winning value such as “BB + small roles 1 to 27”. Although not shown in the drawing, the number of winning combinations and winning numbers in the inside where the flag of BB is established is the same as the general number for numbers 3 to 29 and 36 shown in FIG. 65 for number 1 and 30 to 32 shown in FIG. 65, 49780 for number 2 shown in FIG. 65 (4900 of number 1 is assigned to number 2), and 250 for number 33 shown in FIG. 150 is assigned to the number 33), 8978 is assigned to the number 34 shown in FIG. 65 (500 of the number 31 is assigned to the number 34), and 1010 is assigned to the number 35 shown in FIG. 65 (600 of the number 32 is the number). 35). Note that the flag establishment probability is a number obtained by dividing the number of winning values by the number of random numbers in the extraction range (65536 in this embodiment).

  When the number shown in FIG. 65 is “1” as a result of the internal lottery, it corresponds to a winning value of BB + small roles 1 to 27. More specifically, when the random number value extracted in the internal lottery corresponds to the number “1”, in the game in which the random number value corresponding to the number “1” is extracted, 27 BB symbols are displayed. Without any combination being aligned on the effective line, any one of the 27 bell symbol combinations is always aligned on the effective line. This is because, even if the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped at any timing, the symbol of the small role (bell) appears so as to appear on the active line, and the small character (bell) than the symbol of BB. This is because it is controlled so that the symbol of) is drawn preferentially. Note that the probability of whether the number “1” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted is 4900/65536 in general and 0 in internal. However, if the bell does not win in the game, the bell flag disappears, but the BB flag remains established and is maintained after the next game. Thus, since the probability that the BB flag is established in the internal lottery is 4900/65536, the probability is that the BB flag is established when approximately 13.4 games are played. In addition, since the loss appears only with a probability of 118/56536 (see number 36 in FIG. 65), in the normal state where the BB bonus game is not being executed, the BB and the small part or the general part almost always overlap. And it will be in the winning establishment state. The execution of the game in the normal state is realized by the normal state control means (main control board 409). “Almost always” is, for example, after the bonus game is over, until the BB flag is won, the BB flag is not won, but once the BB flag is won, the bonus game This is because the BB flag is in a winning winning state until the game is executed.

  By the way, the bonus combination is a small combination 1 to 27 (No. 1 in FIG. 65), a cherry combination (No. 30 in FIG. 65), a replay combination (Fig. 65, number 31) and a watermelon role (number 32 in FIG. 65) are selected only for overlapping with one of the roles. In this regard, the bell symbols corresponding to the small roles 1 to 27 are among the 27 patterns regardless of the timing when the stop button is pressed at the time of winning all the patterns (27 patterns) of the small roles 1 to 27. The symbols are arranged on the reels so that the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the bells are stopped and displayed. Similarly, the symbols corresponding to the cherry, replay, and watermelon roles can be used regardless of the timing when the stop button is pressed. The symbols are arranged on the reels so that the symbol combinations to be displayed are stopped. Therefore, in the variable display game in which the bonus is won, the symbol combination combination of BB is not displayed (shown) on the active line.

  If the number of the internal lottery result shown in FIG. That is, 27 different small combinations (small combinations 1 to 27) are all established at the same time. More specifically, when the random number value extracted by the internal lottery is “2”, any one of the 27 bell symbol combinations will always be on the active line in the next game. . Note that the probability of whether the number “2” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted is 44880/65536. Therefore, in most of the games executed, the bell symbols on the appearance are aligned with the active line (the bells on the appearance can also be aligned in the case of numbers 1 and 3 to 29 in FIG. 65). In the slot machine according to this embodiment, regardless of whether it is before or after the transition to the bonus confirmed state, such a high probability, that is, if compared with the conventional slot machine, the bell symbol combination is positioned as a loss. It has come to appear. However, even if the bell symbols are arranged, only a smaller number of medals (here, one) than the number of medals required for execution of the change display is paid out, so that the number of medals does not increase. That is, since the number of medals used in the game is three, even if one medal is paid out, two medals are reduced per game.

  In this way, the 27 small role flags in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment have a function that makes it difficult for the symbol combinations corresponding to BB to be aligned on the effective line even though the BB flag is established. Have. In addition, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the small role is arranged on the effective line, only one medal is paid out. From the player's point of view, it is close to the loss in the conventional slot machine. There is. As described above, in order to effectively handle the bell like a so-called loss, various contrivances are provided in the present embodiment.

  For example, in order to effectively handle 27 small roles like a so-called lose, even if the player wins a bell, it is difficult for the player to notice the payout sound of the medal. As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a medal is paid out, it is possible to confirm that the medal is actually paid out without visually recognizing the mode in which the medal is paid out. In addition, a medal payout sound is output. However, when paying out one medal based on the winning of the bell, it is difficult for the player to notice the payout sound of the medal. As a mode in which the player hardly notices the medal payout sound, the medal payout sound is not output at all even though one medal is paid out. A sound effect such as lowering the sound volume) or a sound effect that is completely different from a normal medal payout sound (for example, a production sound) may not be considered to have been paid out. .

  In addition to the above, the active lines may be arranged in such a way that it is difficult for the player to grasp the symbol combinations arranged on the active line. Furthermore, when any one of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted by the internal lottery, the losing eyes (other than the symbols attached to at least one reel are replaced with the bell symbol combinations). The combination of symbols shown on the effective line with a symbol different from the symbols attached to the two reels, or the symbol combination indicated on the effective line with symbols different from all the reels) It is more effective if it is shown on all active lines.

  In a general slot machine, when a winning combination is won, electronic data called credit is uploaded within a predetermined range (for example, equivalent to 50 medals). Therefore, when the bell symbol combination is shown on the active line (when winning a prize), instead of paying out one medal as a prize, the credit is also increased when the credit is increased by one. It is preferable to make it difficult to grasp the effect. As this aspect, for example, a sound effect (for example, a production sound) that is completely different from a normal credit-up sound that outputs a sound effect that is difficult for the player to hear although the credit-up sound is output (such as lowering the volume) is used. A mode that does not seem to have been credited up by outputting can be considered.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small role is aligned on the effective line, the bell symbol combination is shown, but instead of this, no role is won. In order to give an impression to the player, a symbol combination corresponding to a conventional losing eye may be arranged on the effective line as a symbol combination corresponding to a small role. For example, a symbol combination corresponding to a conventional losing pattern is such that these symbol combinations shown on the active line when all three reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped are all different symbols. It is a combination. However, only one reel may have a different symbol.

  When the result of the internal lottery is the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65, all of the 27 small combinations (small roles 1 to 27) symbol combinations are only partly excluded. A large number of combinations (here, 26 combinations) are aligned on the effective line (26/27 selection). As described above, when a small combination flag is internally established, the internal combination is limited only when the symbol combination corresponding to the internally established flag small combination is stopped so as to be aligned on the active line. The established small roles are aligned on the active line.

  However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the numbers shown in FIG. 65 are “3” to “29”, up to 26 of the 27 small role flags are established in duplicate (in other words, 27 Only one flag among the small combination flags is a non-overlapping flag in which duplication is not established). That is, when the stop operation is performed so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the 26 small combination flags excluding the non-overlapping flag out of 27 are aligned on the effective line, the internally established small combination is the effective line. Align on top.

  On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in such a manner that the symbol combinations corresponding to the 26 small combination flags excluding the non-overlapping flag out of 27 are prevented from being aligned on the active line, the small combination flag is displayed. It is controlled so that the symbol combinations corresponding to are not aligned on the active line (winning combination avoidance control means). That is, when the result of the internal lottery in general is the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65, the symbol combinations corresponding to the 26 small role flags excluding the non-overlapping flag out of 27 are effective. When the stop operation is performed in such a way as to avoid being aligned on the line, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the active line. In addition, when the result of the internal lottery in the inside is the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65, it corresponds to the 26 small combination flags excluding the non-overlapping flag among the 27 small combination flags. When the stop operation is performed in such a manner that the symbol combinations are prevented from being aligned on the effective line, the reels are controlled so that the symbol combinations corresponding to BB are aligned on the effective line (limited bonus indication means). That is, each time an internal lottery is performed, a combination of bell symbols (first number) is given by the fact that any one of the 27 small roles (small roles 1 to 27) flags is not established. BB symbol combination (first symbol combination) that is not stopped and displayed with priority over the second symbol combination) can be stopped and displayed on the active line (priority small part overlapping winning means).

  For example, when the result of the internal lottery in general is the number “3” shown in FIG. 65, a combination of three-color bell symbols excluding “red bell”-“red bell”-“red bell” is on the active line. When the stop operation is performed in such a way that the alignment is avoided, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the active line. When the result of the internal lottery in the inside is the number “3” shown in FIG. 65, the combination of the three-color bell symbols excluding “red bell”-“red bell”-“red bell” is on the active line. When the stop operation is performed in such a way that the alignment is avoided, a symbol combination corresponding to “red 7”-“red 7”-“red 7” is displayed on the active line.

  Thus, when the result of the internal lottery is the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role flag may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation (valid Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the flag of the small combination is missed, the symbol combination corresponding to the flag of BB wins.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the BB flag is established in the internal lottery, and the 26/27 selection bells of the numbers “3” to “29” or the number “36” shown in FIG. Only when winning is achieved, BB symbol combinations can be aligned on the active line. Moreover, since only one medal is paid out when the bell symbol combination is aligned on the effective line, in the normal state, the medal is reduced according to the progress of the game, but the BB symbol combination can be changed depending on its own stop operation. New game characteristics can be created such that can be aligned on the effective line.

  Further, as described above, in the normal state, when the small roles of numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 are won, 26 small combinations of 27 flags excluding non-overlapping flags are supported. Even if a stop operation cannot be performed in such a way that the combination of symbols on the effective line is avoided, the bell symbol combination is always displayed on the effective line (relief award giving means). In this way, the bell symbol combination is effective when the stop operation cannot be performed in such a manner that the symbol combinations corresponding to the 26 small role flags excluding the non-overlapping flag out of 27 are prevented from being aligned on the effective line. By making it appear on the line, the indication on the effective line of the bell symbol combination can be regarded as a relief process for the fact that the symbol combination combination of BB is not indicated on the effective line, Loss of feeling given to the player is reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In particular, if a bonus game is not executed over a long period of time, or the like, if a winning combination is missed, the player is greatly discouraged, but this point can be reduced.

  In this way, in the normal state, BB and any of the small roles and the general roles are almost always overlapped (other than at the time of losing) and are in the winning state, so a probability of 5400/65536 (see FIG. 65, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 26 small combination flags excluding the non-overlapping flag out of the 27 small combination flags. The chances of stopping operation will be lost in such a way that it is avoided that they are aligned on the active line. Therefore, even if a game without a bonus game continues, whether or not the bonus game is performed is not determined unilaterally on the slot machine 1 side as in the conventional gaming machine. This not only reduces the feeling of labor that can be given to the player due to the fact that the game is completely wasted, but also can suppress a decrease in game motivation. In addition, the player can avoid the timing corresponding to the 26 small role flags if the stop operation is performed at any timing in the game in which the small roles of numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 are won. There is also a pleasure that you can perform the stop operation with a pulling feeling like pulling a kite.

  In the slot machine 1, the first reel 301a and the second reel are displayed when the small roles of numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 are pushed forward (left → middle → right) in the winning game. For at least one of the reels 302a, the stop operation is performed in such a manner that the symbol combinations corresponding to the 26 small combination flags excluding the non-overlapping flag out of the 27 small combination flags are aligned on the active line. If not, it is always controlled so that a single template with a bell symbol only appears on the active line. That is, at this time, the bonus template is not displayed on the active line (limited bonus template display means). In this way, the bonus temper is divided into three reels by avoiding the timing corresponding to the 26 small role flags excluding the non-overlapping flag in the game in which the small roles of numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 are won. Since the reel stop control is performed so that it only appears when the stop operation is performed for two of the reels and when the number “36” shown in FIG. 65 is selected, the reel stop control is performed. When it comes to a bonus tempo, the player feels a great excitement and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  However, among the three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, avoiding the timing corresponding to the 26 small role flags excluding the duplicate flag in the game in which the small roles of numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. When a stop operation is performed on the two reels 301a and 301b, a bonus tempo and a small role temper (belten pie) are always established in an overlapping manner. In this way, if the bonus tempo and the small role temper (belten pie) are formed in an overlapping manner, the timing corresponding to the 26 small role flags can be avoided with a one-third probability only in the remaining one reel. , “7” symbol combination wins. In addition, when the loss of the number “36” shown in FIG. 65 is selected, the winning of the symbol combination combination of BB is decided at this time. Therefore, the expectation given to the player at the time of bonus tempering becomes very large. Here, the bonus tempering is a state in which only the symbol that is stopped and displayed last among the symbols attached to the three-time reels is in the rotation display state, and the symbol in the rotation display state is stopped and displayed. 7 "It is the aspect which comprises the combination of a symbol. That is, when the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are already in the stop display state and only the right reel 301c is in the rotation display state, the “7” symbol is displayed on the effective lines of the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b. This is a mode in which the display is stopped.

  Note that the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is premised on forward push, and if the small roles of numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 are not pushed forward in the winning game, the bell symbol combination Will not be able to win a prize and will lose any of the roles.

  In addition, the non-overlapping flag varies depending on any of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. That is, each time an internal lottery is performed, the non-overlapping flag is changed. When the non-overlapping flag is changed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role flag (bell symbol combination) is stopped on the active line. The operation timing is variable. In other words, when the non-overlapping flag is changed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role flag is not aligned on the active line (the symbol combination corresponding to BB can be aligned on the effective line). Is variable. Thereby, every time the game is executed, a new game characteristic can be provided such that a timing of a stop operation that can be performed on a valid line with a symbol combination corresponding to the variable BB is predicted.

  For example, when the result of the internal lottery is the number “3” shown in FIG. 65, that is, when the flags of the small roles 2 to 27 are established, the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role 1 Even if the stop operation is performed so that the combination of bell symbols corresponding to the small role 1 is aligned with the effective line, the symbols are not aligned. However, at this time, if the BB flag is established, the combination of the “7” symbols is aligned with the active line.

  Further, for example, when the result of the internal lottery is the number “5” shown in FIG. 65, that is, when the flags of the small roles 1, 2, and 3 to 27 are established, the symbol corresponding to the small role 3 As for the combination, even if the stop operation is performed so that the combination of bell symbols corresponding to the small role 3 is aligned with the effective line, the symbols are not aligned. However, at this time, if the BB flag is established, the combination of the “7” symbols is aligned with the active line. Thus, depending on the result of the internal lottery, the timing of the stop operation in which the combination of bell symbols is not aligned on the active line is different each time.

  In this way, when the result of the internal lottery is the number “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65, the BB is won with about 1/10 (number “1”, “30” to “32”. If a BB flag that can be established with a winning probability of 6150/65536) is established, it can be said that this is a bonus release chance game in which a symbol combination corresponding to BB can always be displayed on the active line. In addition, the stop operation timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to BB is displayed on the active line is different every time (the result is different every time the result of the internal lottery is “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65). Do not know when to stop. Moreover, since the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 are extracted as a result of the internal lottery, the probabilities are all 200/65536, so the bell as a small role is activated with a probability of 5400/65536. The chances of avoiding aligning to BB will be lost (however, in addition to this, BB can be aligned on the effective line in the case of loss). Therefore, the player can provide a new gameability such as being able to predict which of the 1/27 exclusion flag is in each game. Moreover, if it is a lucky player, it can be avoided that the bell as a small role is frequently aligned with the active line. In this way, there is a chance that it can be avoided to align the bell as a small role on the active line at a high frequency such as about once every 13 games, so it can be avoided that wasteful games continue, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, a medal can be obtained at any timing (for example, stopped at any position on the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c). In addition to the general combination in which a symbol combination that allows the execution condition of the payout (small role game) to be established appears, it is stopped only when it is stopped at a specific timing (for example, corresponding to a predetermined part of the reel) Only in some cases, a small combination (specific small combination) in which a symbol combination that allows the execution condition of the medal payout (small combination game) can be established is prepared. When the small combination (specific small combination) is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed in preference to the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination winning. On this basis, some of the small roles having different flags (the third power of 3 which is a combination of “red bell”, “blue bell” and “white bell” = 27 small roles) are selected. A large number of small roles from which only a combination (in this case) is removed are made to win simultaneously. That is, even if it is controlled to the bonus finalized state, it is difficult to stop and display the symbol combination of the bonus combination that triggers the execution of the bonus game by the priority display, but “Red 7”, “ Out of 27 combinations of “Blue 7” and “White 7” symbols, only the combination of “7” symbols placed on reels in places where the above-mentioned minor roles are not subject to priority display can be stopped. By doing so, the possibility of being stopped and displayed by the symbol combination of the bonus combination that becomes the execution opportunity of the bonus game is left slightly.

  However, whether or not to force a half-forced game (small role game) in which only a minimum number of medals are paid out by simultaneously winning a lot of such small roles is controlled in a bonus confirmed state. Regardless of the lottery, the player is estimated with the highest probability as a result of the lottery, so that the player estimates the fact even if the bonus is determined, and aims at a specific removed reel portion. It is difficult to stop and display a specific combination of symbols. Therefore, normally, a player often plays a game while determining that a normal game in which a bonus combination has not yet been won is being played.

  However, according to the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if it seems that a normal game is apparently played, it is actually coupled with the high winning probability of the bonus combination. Of the 27 combinations of the “Red 7”, “Blue 7”, and “White 7” symbols that allow the execution condition of the bonus game to be satisfied each time the variation display is performed. Although it is only a combination of “7” symbols placed on the reels at places where the above-mentioned small role is not prioritized by the small role, the player has a special opportunity to stop the display and shift to the bonus game. Often granted. When the combination of symbols “7” is accidentally stopped and displayed due to this special opportunity, it seems as if the symbol combination of bonus has suddenly appeared. It becomes possible to play with a hot expectation that the combination of symbols may be stopped and displayed, and as a result, it is possible to raise the level of the gaming interest in every game scene.

  Moreover, according to the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the transition to the bonus confirmed state is controlled by winning the bonus combination, a plurality of small combinations (“red bell”, “blue bell”, “white bell”) (3 cubed = 27 small roles), multiple winning combinations (overlap), and priority display for symbol combination “7” according to the selected winning roles Thus, normally, a considerable number of lottery games will be consumed after the transition control is performed and before the combination of symbols “7” is actually stopped and displayed. Therefore, as compared with the conventional slot machine, it is faster by setting the winning probability (for example, “1/10”) of the bonus combination higher while maintaining the expected total number of medals paid out in the bonus game. It becomes possible to shift to a bonus finalized state at a stage. After the transition control to the bonus confirmed state in this way, each time the symbol variation display is performed, the symbol combination “7” is unlikely to be stopped and displayed. Since it is possible to stop the above symbol display with the chance to appear, it is expected to be hot over a wide period by shifting to the bonus finalized state at an early stage even with such a high bonus probability It becomes possible to play with.

  In this case, the actual entry probability to the bonus game is calculated by the winning probability of the bonus combination and the symbol appearance probability that the combination of the “7” symbols is stopped and displayed in the bonus finalized state. Accordingly, the winning probability of the bonus combination is a symbol appearance probability, that is, a probability determined by the overlapping degree related to the winning of at least a plurality of small roles (a combination of bell symbols excluded from all combinations of bell symbols “ Only 1/27 ") can be set lower than before. However, in order to improve game entertainment by shifting to the bonus finalized state at an earlier stage, the probability (bonus role winning probability) is the probability determined by the overlapping degree of winning for multiple small roles It is desirable to set a higher value.

  When the number shown in FIG. 65 is “30”, it corresponds to the winning value of BB + cherry. More specifically, when the random value extracted by the internal lottery is “30”, any one of 27 combinations of BB symbol combinations and cherry symbol combinations will become an active line in the next game. Will be aligned. The probability that the number “30” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted is 150/65536. However, if the cherry is not won in the next game, the cherry flag disappears, but the BB flag remains established and is maintained after the next game.

  When the number shown in FIG. 65 is “31”, it corresponds to the winning value of BB + replay. More specifically, when the random value extracted by the internal lottery is “31”, any one of the 27 BB symbol combination combinations and the replay symbol combinations is set as the active line in the next game. Will be aligned. Note that the probability that the number “31” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted is 500/65536. Here, the reels are controlled so that the replay symbols are aligned on the active line with priority over any symbol, and the replay symbols are always aligned on the symbol array, so replay is effective in the next game. Align on the line. Also, the BB flag is maintained and maintained after the next game.

  When the number shown in FIG. 65 is “32”, it corresponds to the winning value of BB + watermelon. More specifically, when the random value extracted in the internal lottery is “32”, any one of the 27 BB symbol combination combinations and the watermelon symbol combinations becomes the active line in the next game. Will be aligned. The probability that the number “32” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted is 600/65536. However, if the watermelon does not win in the next game, the watermelon flag disappears, but the BB flag remains established and is maintained after the next game.

  The numbers “33” to “35” shown in FIG. 65 are the winning values for each of cherry, replay, and watermelon, respectively. More specifically, when the random value extracted in the internal lottery is “33”, the cherries are preferentially aligned on the active line in the next game, and the random value extracted in the internal lottery is “ In the case of “34”, replays are preferentially arranged on the active line in the next game, and in the case where the random number value extracted in the internal lottery is “35”, the watermelon is preferential on the active line in the next game. Will be complete. The probability of whether the number “33” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted is 159/65536, the probability of whether the number “34” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted is 8478/65536, and the number “35” shown in FIG. The probability of being extracted is 410/65536. However, if the cherry or watermelon flag is established, these flags disappear if no winning is made in the next game, but the BB flag remains established and is maintained after the next game. When the replay flag is established, as described above, the replay is always on the active line in the next game. Therefore, the probability that the number “34” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted is higher than the probability that the number “33” or “35” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted.

  From the above, the probability that the BB flag is established in the internal lottery is 6150/65536, and the BB flag is established approximately once in about 10 games. However, even if the BB flag is established, if the number “2” or “31” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted in the internal lottery, the symbol combination corresponding to BB is always selected as described above. Cannot be established on the active line. In addition, when any one of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted by the internal lottery, the symbol combination corresponding to BB is only displayed on the effective line with a probability of 1/27. Can not be established. If the cherry or watermelon flag is established in the internal lottery, the combination corresponding to cherry or watermelon will be aligned on the active line with priority over the combination corresponding to BB. The probability that the flag is established is smaller than the probability that the bell or replay flag is established.

  Thus, although the BB flag is established internally with a very high probability, it is difficult to align the combinations corresponding to BB on the effective line. In a normal gaming state, the probability that the combinations corresponding to BB are aligned on the active line is at least 1/270 or less.

  By the way, the red bell, blue bell, and white bell are arranged in the vicinity of red 7, blue 7, and white 7, respectively. That is, if the stop operation is aimed at the red 7, the red bell can appear on the active line, and if the stop operation is aimed at the blue 7, the blue bell can appear on the active line. A white bell can appear on the active line when the stop operation is performed aiming at.

  Here, when any one of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted when the flag of BB is established, the combination corresponding to BB is selected as an effective line with a probability of 1/27. As described above, the above can be aligned, but in other words, when the BB flag is established and any one of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted. In addition, it is possible to align the symbols corresponding to BB on the effective line by instructing the player which small role cannot be aligned on the active line with a probability of 1/27.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, when the replay combination with the number “31” or “34” shown in FIG. 65 is won, the stop operation of the three reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed at any timing. Even if it is done, the replay symbol combination is shown on the active line.

  However, as a result of the player performing a stop operation of the two reels 301a and 301b, “7” of the array number 19 (see FIG. 62) is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 301a, and the upper part of the middle reel 301b is arranged. In some cases, the number 19 (see FIG. 62) “7” is stopped. At this time, a bonus tempering is performed on the upper horizontal line L1 (see FIG. 61), and a replay tempering is performed on the right rising line L5 (see FIG. 61). In this way, the bonus tempe and the replay temper overlap the number “36” shown in FIG. 65 in addition to the case where the replay combination number “31” or “34” shown in FIG. 65 is won. Only in the case of loss (in the case of loss, the symbol combination combination of BB is shown on the effective line regardless of the stop timing). Here, the probability that the replay combination with the number “31” or “34” shown in FIG. 65 is won is 8978/65536, whereas the probability that the loss with the number “34” shown in FIG. 65 is established is 65536. It is extremely low at 118 minutes.

  In this way, when the bonus template and another symbol are overlapped, the expectation that the symbol combination combination of BB is displayed on the active line differs depending on whether the other symbol is a bell or a replay. . The player is generally interested in whether or not the bonus tempering has been performed when the reels 301a and 301b are stopped, and after confirming that the bonus tempering has been performed, other symbols are tempered. It is considered to confirm whether or not there is. As a result, when the bonus template and another symbol are overlapped and the template is overlapped, the expectation that the symbol combination combination of BB is displayed on the effective line differs depending on the other symbol. It is possible to enjoy the fun unique to a gaming machine such as a slot machine in which a reel is stopped by its own stop operation and a symbol is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the stop operation of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c performed by the player is supported based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when any one of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted when the BB flag is in the winning state, the small role bell is aligned with the active line. The avoidable timing is actively instructed by the player (award denial support means). For example, in the case where the number shown in FIG. 65 is “5”, even though a prize is given by winning the bell role as a small role, a white reel, You are prompted to stop with the red on the middle reel and red on the right reel. When the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped at the timing urged as described above, the reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combination “white bell red bell bell red bell” corresponding to the small role 3 is not aligned on the effective line. Is done. As described above, the symbol combination “white bell red bell bell red bell” corresponding to the small role 3 is not aligned on the active line when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped at the timing thus prompted. This is because the same color 7 and the bell are arranged in the vicinity of each other. As a result, the combinations corresponding to the BB having a higher degree of profit given to the player than the bell role as a small role are aligned on the active line, and corresponds to the BB compared to when the stop operation is not supported. The frequency with which the combinations are aligned on the active line (and thus the frequency with which the BB game is executed) can be dramatically increased, new game playability that has never been possible can be provided, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in a normal state not during the bonus game period, the lottery means has a bonus flag with a predetermined probability by creating a support period in which the support is performed and a non-support period in which the support is not performed. The probability that the bonus game will be executed will be substantially changed between the support period and the non-support period even though the internal lottery will be executed. means). That is, in the normal state, when any one of the small combinations of numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination in the winning state is displayed on the active line. The timing for avoiding this is suggested to the player. As a result, the probability that the symbol corresponding to the small role or general role in the winning state is shown on the active line is almost always in the normal state, although the small role or general role is in the winning state. And non-support period. As a result, as described above, the probability that the bonus game is executed can be made variable.

  Note that the above support can be realized by, for example, displaying an image on the image display body 500 or outputting a sound effect from the speaker 512 or the like.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fact that the winning combination of the small role (Bell 1-27) or the general role (cherry, watermelon, replay) is established is displayed by the image display 500, the speaker 512, or the like. An appealing effect that appeals to the player is provided by sound effects (appealing means).

  By the way, in the conventional slot machine, in order to give the player a sense of expectation, there is often a false expectation effect indicating that he has won some role, even though he has not actually won any role. Is called.

  In this regard, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal state, a small combination or a general combination is always won in the internal lottery, except for a loss. Therefore, even if the appeal effect is performed, the effect cannot be a false effect. In addition, during the normal state, the BB is almost always in the winning state, so even if the result of the internal lottery is lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is shown on the active line at this time. Therefore, it cannot be a false production. Thereby, the anaerobic feeling that a player can feel due to frequent false performances can be reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In the internal lottery in the BB game, the number “2” shown in FIG. 65 is extracted with a high frequency, and the symbol combinations corresponding to the small roles 1 to 27 (that is, the bell symbol combinations) appear on the active line. At this time, one medal is paid out. In addition to the number “2” shown in FIG. 65, any of the numbers “3” to “29” can be extracted.

  In addition, as described above, the number of medals to be paid out when the bells are aligned on the active line (when winning) is set to be the number “2” shown in FIG. 65 when the internal lottery is performed. This is because, even if the BB flag is established, the combination corresponding to BB is difficult to be established on the active line even if the BB flag is established.

  The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of setting values (four stages from setting values 1 to 4) (each not shown). In each set value, a difference (step difference, extreme difference, etc.) is given to the internal lottery probability. As the set value increases, such as set value 1 <set value 2 <set value 3 <set value 4, the internal lottery probabilities of the small roles of numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. It is configured to be high. For example, compared to the set value 1, the set value 4 has a high winning probability for the small roles of numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. There is a higher frequency that the chance of stopping operation is increased in such a manner that the symbol combinations corresponding to the 26 small combination flags other than the above are prevented from being arranged on the active line. By providing stepwise set values in this way, the slot machine 1 can be used as a clue when the player guesses the set value by giving a characteristic to each set value or according to the management of the hall or the like. Can be operated. The setting value is not limited to the above. Moreover, you may comprise so that the internal lottery probability of the overlapping combination of number BB (number "1" shown in FIG. 65, "30"-"32" shown in FIG. 65) may become high independently or with the said small combination.

[Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation for stopping the reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is waited. FIG. 66 shows the content of reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected according to an internal lottery flag indicating the result of the internal lottery in the game. In this reel stop control table, patterns are prepared in advance for all the internal lottery flags, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the internal lottery flag in the above step S201, it enters a standby state until a pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (steps S202, S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF) It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in and after step S202 are repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are received (stop operation procedure) is a stop operation procedure (or pressing sequence) called “forward press”, “reverse press”, and “middle press”, respectively. Say).

The above-described “forward press” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 301a first (that is, a procedure for pressing the left reel stop button 211a first). From the reel operation order to stop after
[Left reel → Middle reel → Right reel],
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures: [Left reel → Right reel → Middle reel]. In this embodiment, [left reel → middle reel → right reel] is referred to as “forward push”, and [left reel → right reel → middle reel] is also referred to as “forward scissor push”.

The above-mentioned “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure is an operation procedure for stopping the right reel 301c first (in other words, the right reel stop button 211c is set to the first one, as opposed to “forward pressing” or “forward scissor pressing”). The procedure of the second pressing operation), from the operation order of the reels to be stopped after the second,
[Right reel-> middle reel-> left reel]
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures: [Right reel → Left reel → Middle reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “reverse pressing”. Note that the latter stop operation procedure is sometimes called “reverse scissor pressing”.

The above-mentioned “middle push” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 301b first (that is, a procedure for pressing the middle reel stop button 211b first). From the operation order of reels to be stopped later,
[Center reel → Left reel → Right reel],
Or
The operation is further divided into two stop operation procedures [middle reel → right reel → left reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “middle press”.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. In step S201, the left reel stop button 211a is first pressed (first) from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c in accordance with the stop operation procedure of “forward pressing” or “forward scissor pressing”. If so, the determination at step S202 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The “first reel” as used herein refers to a reel that receives a stop operation first or stops first. In this example (“forward press”), the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In the first reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag (winning symbol display means).

  In step S206, the reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the effective lines of the slot machine 1 are only two lines, the lower right line and the lower line, at this time, the stop control table for the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) is determined to be one. be able to. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is referred to as a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol at the upper or lower position can be the winning combination symbol. If the symbol has a characteristic, a reel stop control table is selected that can align the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the symbol. It will be. As a result, winning symbols other than the BB symbol and the RB symbol can be aligned without the need for pressing (details will be described in reel stop control).

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the processing from step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and that the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. To do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203. At this time, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1), this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, the control of the stop position of the corresponding winning symbol is executed based on the reel control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). (Winning symbol display means). At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stopped reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processes in steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes in steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right reel stop process (step S220), the control of the stop position of the winning symbol is executed based on the reel control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag (winning symbol display means).

  In step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process ends.

  In the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, the same description as above can be made, and the details are omitted. However, since the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure is partially different from the above description, it will be described below.

  The “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure is different from the “forward pressing”, “forward scissor pressing” or “middle pressing” stopping operation procedure described above in step S221 (the remaining reel stop control after the first reel stopping process). Table determination). That is, in the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is stopped, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stops of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid It is possible to arrange the winning symbols in any line. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

[Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control for drawing the winning symbol (corresponding winning symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control) is performed. Specifically, when a player's reel stop operation is accepted, a range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (a range in which the corresponding winning symbol can be drawn, for example, four symbols). Minutes) is determined in advance, and if the corresponding winning combination symbol is within the range, control is performed to pull the symbol into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reel. The “retractable range” here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel from when the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the pullable range is a maximum of 4 symbols, when a reel stop operation is accepted, the reel can be further rotated up to 4 symbols based on the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is received, the corresponding winning symbol is within the range that can be drawn. If there is, the winning winning symbol can be moved to the symbol display window 401 and stopped. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player is slightly ahead of the winning winning symbol, if the winning winning symbol is within the pullable range, the winning symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of losing (the winning bonus cannot be obtained and the gaming bonus corresponding to the winning bonus cannot be acquired and the gaming bonus disappears).

  In the slot machine 1, as described above, when the winning flag is established for almost all winning combinations except for the BB that has been won repeatedly, the corresponding winning symbol is always arranged without requiring the player's attention. (See FIG. 62 described above).

  In addition, cherry patterns can be arranged without the need for a cherry tree.

  From the above, in the slot machine 1, it is possible to align almost all winning symbol patterns without needing to push, except for the BB that has been won in duplicate. In other words, the winning combination excluding the BB that has been won in duplicate does not cause “missing”. In addition, for this BB, if the other winning combinations are not won in a duplicate, the BB symbols can be aligned without needing to press. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible that the difference in profits between players is increased due to the difference in skill (for example, a large difference in the number of medals obtained).

  Here, specific examples of the reel stop control will be described with reference to FIGS. 62, 67, 68, 69, and 70. FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a slip table for reel stop control when the result of the internal lottery is the number “1” or “2” shown in FIG. 65, and (a) a slide table for the left reel 301a, (b ) Slide table for the middle reel 301b when only the left reel 301a is in the stopped state, (c) When the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the stopped state, the “bell” symbol is shown on the lower right effective line (D) When the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the stopped state, the “bell” symbol is shown on the effective line that goes up to the right reel 301c. This is a sliding table.

  FIG. 68 is a slide table for the reel stop control when the result of the internal lottery is “29” shown in FIG. 65, (a) the slide table for the left reel 301a, (b). When only the left reel 301a is in a stopped state, a bonus symbol is displayed on the effective line of the left reel 301a (if the left reel 301a is first stopped, all of the upper, middle, and lower stages). A sliding table for the middle reel 301b in the case, (c) a sliding table for the middle reel 301b when only the left reel 301a is in a stopped state and no bonus symbol is shown on the active line of the left reel 301a, (D) When the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the stopped state, the “white 7” symbol is tempered. (E) When the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in a stopped state, the symbols shown on the active line of the middle reel 301 are as follows. “Red 7” or “Blue 7”, the slide table for the right reel 301c when the BB symbol is tempered, (f) “White 7” symbol when the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the stopped state (G) When the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in a stopped state, the “white 7” symbol is tempered and the BB flag is not in a winning state. It is a slide table about the right reel 301c.

  FIG. 69 is a slide table for reel stop control when the result of the internal lottery is the number “31” or “34” shown in FIG. 65, (a) a slide table for the left reel 301a, (b ) Slide table for the middle reel 301b when only the left reel 301a is in a stopped state, (c) When the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in a stopped state, a “replay” symbol is shown on the lower right active line (D) When the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the stopped state, the “replay” symbol is shown on the effective line that goes up to the right reel 301c. This is a sliding table.

  FIG. 70 is a slide table for the reel stop control when the result of the internal lottery is the number “36” shown in FIG. 65, (a) the slide table for the left reel 301a, (b). Slide table for the right reel 301c when only the left reel 301a is in the stopped state, (c) When the BB symbol is tempered on the upper horizontal effective line when the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are in the stopped state Sliding table for the middle reel 301b, (d) Sliding table for the middle reel 301b when the BB symbol is tempered on the lower horizontal effective line when the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are stopped, (e) When the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are in a stopped state, the BB symbol rises to the right The other is a sliding table, for the reel 301b in the case where the Tenpai on a downward-sloping effective line.

  67 to 70 are stored in a ROM built in a main control MPU as a microprocessor provided in the main control board 409.

  The array element numbers shown in FIGS. 67 to 70 are the array element numbers of the symbols positioned in the lower stage when the reels 301a to 301c are stopped, and are illustrated in FIGS. 67 to 70. The number of slips is the number of symbols on the symbol that moves from when the reels 301a to 301c are stopped until the reel on which the stop operation has been performed actually stops. For example, referring to FIG. 67 (a), the number of slips is 3 when the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at the timing when the symbol (watermelon) of array number 1 is positioned in the lower stage of the left reel 301a. At this time, the reel stop control is performed so that the pattern (watermelon) of array number 4 is positioned in the lower stage. The sequence number of the symbol is the sequence number shown in FIG. 62 (hereinafter the same).

  In the slip table, the number of slips (the number of symbols on the symbol that moves from when the reels 301a to 301c are stopped until the reel where the stop operation is actually stopped) is set as described above. For example, a slip flag corresponding to each sequence number may be set. For example, the table does not stop the reel if the flag is 0, and stops the reel when the flag is 1.

  The number of slips shown in FIGS. 67 to 70 is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the flag established as a result of the internal lottery is displayed on the active line. Details are as follows. Note that when the result of the internal lottery is any one of the numbers “1” to “35” shown in FIG. 65, the sliding control is performed on the premise of the forward push, and the result of the internal lottery is the number “ In the case of “36”, the slip control is performed on the premise that the forward scissors are pushed. Therefore, the order in which the player should perform the stop operation is suggested according to the result of the internal lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is the number “36” shown in FIG. 65, the user is prompted to perform forward scissors.

  When the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “1” and “2” shown in FIG. 65, among the three-color bell symbol combinations (27 ways) corresponding to the small roles 1 to 27 for which the flag is established Any one of the bell symbol combinations corresponding to the timing at which each of the reels 301a to 301c is stopped is displayed on the effective line L5 (see FIG. 61) ascending to the right as much as possible. Stop control is performed (small winning prize control means (useless feeling suppression means)). In other words, when the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “1” and “2” shown in FIG. 65, there is no possibility that the combination of BB symbols is displayed on the active line. Therefore, in order to increase the expectation when the BB symbol is displayed on the effective line of the left reel 301a, the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at a timing at which both the BB symbol and the bell symbol can be displayed on the effective line. Even if possible, only the bell symbol of the BB symbol and the bell symbol is shown on the effective line, and the BB symbol is not shown on the effective line of the left reel 301a. However, in principle (always), the BB symbol is not shown on the left reel 301a. However, when the left reel 301a is stopped, the bell symbol and the BB symbol are rarely displayed on the left reel. The frequency at which the player is expected to be expected is increased by making it appear in 301a (always winning incentive promotion means (labor game suppression promotion means)). Here, “in principle, the BB symbol is not shown on the left reel 301a. However, when the left reel 301a is stopped, the BB symbol is rarely shown on the left reel 301a. “In principle”, “in principle” means that the BB symbol is not shown on the left reel 301a more frequently than the frequency at which the BB symbol is shown on the left reel 301a when the left reel 301a is stopped. It is used in the sense that frequency is higher. When the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “1” and “2” shown in FIG. 65, the bell symbol combination is always shown on the active line, so the operation of stopping the left reel 301a was performed. At this time, the stop control of the left reel 301a is always performed so that one of the three color bell symbols is shown on the active line.

  Specifically, when the left reel 301a is stopped, any one of the three-color bell symbols corresponding to the timing of the stop operation is displayed in the upper stage or the lower stage (the lower stage has priority). Thus, stop control of the left reel 301a is performed. For example, if the left reel 301a is stopped at the timing when the cherry of SEQ ID NO: 2 is in the lower stage, both the white bell and white 7 can be shown in the upper or lower stage (within 4 frames). As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the left reel 301a slides four frames from the time when the stop operation is performed, and the “white bell” of array number 6 is shown in the lower row, and “red 7”, “blue 7” and “white” None of “7” is shown. However, when the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at the timing when the watermelon of SEQ ID NO: 1 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 3, the “white bell” of SEQ ID NO: 6 is in the upper stage, and “ “White 7” is shown in the middle. As described above, none of “Red 7”, “Blue 7”, and “White 7” is shown at the timing when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 2 to 4, 6, 9 to 13, and 16 to 20 are in the lower stage. This is a case where a stop operation of the reel 301a is performed. On the other hand, any one of “red 7”, “blue 7” and “white 7” is shown only in SEQ ID NOs: 1, 5, 7, 8, 14, 15, 21. That is, the frequency at which none of “Red 7”, “Blue 7”, and “White 7” is shown in the free hit is 2/3, and “Red 7”, “Blue 7” and The frequency at which one of “White 7” is displayed is one third. Thereby, when the BB symbol is shown on the left reel 301a, it is possible to increase the player's expectation.

  Next, when the middle reel 301b is operated to stop, any one of the three color bell symbols corresponding to the timing of the stop operation is always displayed in the middle stage (the upper or lower stage shows that Absent). For example, when the stop operation of the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 1 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the middle reel 301b slides two frames from the time when the stop operation is performed. Four “white bells” are shown in the middle. If the stop operation of the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when blue 7 of array number 8 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 0, and “blue bell” of array number 9 is displayed in the middle stage.

  Next, when the right reel 301c is operated to stop, if the bell symbol is on the right lower effective line L4 (see FIG. 61), the lower stage shows the timing when the bell symbol is stopped. If one of the corresponding bell symbols appears, and the bell symbol is on the right-up effective line L5 (see FIG. 61), the upper row corresponds to the timing of the stop operation of the three colored bell symbols. One of the bell symbols is displayed. For example, if the bell symbol is on the right-down effective line L4 (see FIG. 61), the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 4 is in the lower stage, FIG. 67 (c). As shown in FIG. 6, the right reel 301c slides three frames from the time when the stop operation is performed, and the “white bell” of array number 7 is shown in the lower row, and the bell is placed on the lower right effective line L4 (see FIG. 61). A symbol combination is shown. Also, if the bell symbol is on the effective line L5 that rises to the right (see FIG. 61), when the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the white 7 of the array element number 5 is in the lower stage, FIG. ), The number of slips at this time is 0, the “white bell” of SEQ ID NO: 7 is shown in the upper stage, and the symbol combination of bells is placed on the effective line L5 that rises to the right (see FIG. 61). Illustrated.

  In this way, when the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “1” and “2” shown in FIG. 65, 27 BBs are always provided regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the reels 301a to 301c. In order to prevent any of the symbol combinations from appearing on the effective line, any one of the 27 bell symbol combinations is the right-down effective line L4 (see FIG. 61) and the right-up effective. As shown in any of the lines L5 (see FIG. 61), stop control of each of the reels 301a to 301c is performed (however, the stop control is performed so that the reels 301a to 301c are preferentially shown in the rising right effective line L5. ) It should be noted that this control is the same regardless of whether it is in general or inside.

  When the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65, as described above, only the flag of one of the small roles 1 to 27 is not established ( The non-established small combination flag is the above-described non-overlapping flag), and the remaining 26 small combinations are established. At this time, the stop operation of each of the reels 301a to 301c is performed at a timing when any one of the 26 bell symbol combinations corresponding to the small role for which the flag is established is displayed on the effective line. Any one of the bell symbol combinations corresponding to the timing at which the reels 301a to 301c are stopped is selected from the upper horizontal effective line L1 (see FIG. 61) or the right-up effective line L5 (see FIG. 61). As shown in any of these, stop control of each of the reels 301a to 301c is performed. This is true even in the inside as well as in general. Because even if it is inside, the reel stop control is performed so that the bell symbol combination corresponding to the small role for which the flag is established is displayed on the effective line in preference to the symbol combination of BB. Because it is done.

  In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing that prevents the 26 bell symbol combinations corresponding to the small combinations for which the flag has been established from being displayed on the active line, if the inside operation is in progress, the three colors Among the BB symbols of BB, the BB symbol constituting the winning combination of BB symbols (the BB symbol positioned in the vicinity of the bell symbol constituting the bell symbol combination corresponding to the non-overlapping flag, As shown in the middle horizontal effective line L2 (see FIG. 61), the reels 301a to 301c are controlled to be stopped (grand prize period occurrence suppression means). On the other hand, if it is general, the symbol combination of the loss is shown on all the effective lines L1 to L5.

  When the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at a timing at which the BB symbol that can win a prize can be displayed, the BB symbol that can win the prize and the vicinity (the left reel 301a) If limited, the stop control is performed so that both the bell symbols located at the top, that is, the array number obtained by adding 1 to the BB symbol that can be won, the same applies hereinafter) are displayed on the active line. On the other hand, among the BB symbols of the three colors, the left reel 301a at a timing at which the other two BB symbols different from the winning BB symbols (hereinafter referred to as “non-winning BB symbol”) can be displayed. When the stop operation is performed, the BB symbol which cannot be won is not shown on the active line as much as possible, and the BB symbol which is positioned in the vicinity of the BB symbol which cannot be won and the BB symbol which cannot be won, The stop control of the left reel 301a is performed so that only the bell symbol located in the vicinity of the non-winning BB symbol is shown on the active line. However, in principle (always), the non-winning BB symbol is not shown on the left reel 301a. However, when the left reel 301a is stopped, in rare cases, the non-winning BB symbol is not displayed. Is displayed on the left reel 301a, thereby increasing the frequency of giving the player a sense of expectation. Here, “in principle (always), the BB symbol that cannot be won is not shown on the left reel 301a, but when the left reel 301a is stopped, it is rarely impossible to win. “Principally” of “Make the BB symbol appear on the left reel 301a” means that, when the left reel 301a is stopped, the winning BB symbol is shown on the left reel 301a. The frequency at which the non-winning BB symbol is not shown on the left reel 301a is used in a higher sense than the frequency. Hereinafter, stop control of the reels 301a to 301c inside will be described.

  More specifically, when the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at a timing when a BB symbol that can be won among the three colors of BB symbols is displayed on the active line, a bell symbol positioned near the BB symbol that can be won is displayed. The stop control of the left reel 301a is performed (special symbol display control means) so that the BB symbols that can be won are displayed in the upper row, respectively. For example, when the result of the internal lottery is the number “29” shown in FIG. 65, since the BB symbol that can be won is the “white 7” symbol, the left reel 301a has a timing when the watermelon with the array number 1 is in the lower stage. When the stop operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 68A, the number of slips at this time is 3, with “white bell” of SEQ ID NO: 6 in the upper row and “white 7” in SEQ ID NO: 5 in the middle row. , Respectively.

  On the other hand, if the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at the timing when the non-winning BB symbol is displayed on the active line among the three color BB symbols, the non-winning BB symbol is on the active line as much as possible. The stop control of the left reel 301a is performed so that a bell symbol positioned in the vicinity of the BB symbol that cannot be won is displayed in the lower stage. For example, when the result of the internal lottery is the number “29” shown in FIG. 65, the BB symbol that can be won is the “white 7” symbol, so the “red 7” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol both win. It becomes impossible BB symbol. When the operation of stopping the left reel 301a is performed at a timing when, for example, the cherry of the array number 9 is in the lower stage as a timing at which this “blue 7” symbol that cannot be won can be displayed on the active line, FIG. As shown in a), the number of slips at this time is 4, the “blue bell” of SEQ ID NO: 13 is shown in the lower row, and the “blue 7” of SEQ ID NO: 12 is not shown on the active line (SEQ ID NO: The “red 7” symbol of 3 is of course not shown). However, when the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 7 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 4, as shown in FIG. “Bell” is shown in the upper row, and “Blue 7” of SEQ ID NO: 12 is shown in the middle row. Thus, the stop control of the left reel 301a is performed so that any one of the three colors of bell symbols is always shown on the effective line. This is because when the result of the internal lottery is the number “29” shown in FIG. 65, the combination of BB symbols is always displayed when the combination of BB symbols is not expressed.

  Note that when the result of the internal lottery is the number “29” shown in FIG. 65, the winning operation is not performed even though the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at a timing at which the BB symbol that cannot be won can be displayed. Neither “red 7” nor “blue 7”, which are possible BB symbols, are shown when the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at the timing when the symbols of array numbers 9 to 13 and 16 to 20 are in the lower stage. is there. On the other hand, only SEQ ID NOs: 7, 8, 14, and 15 show either “red 7” or “blue 7”. In other words, in the case of a free hit, even though the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at a timing at which a non-winning BB symbol can be displayed, the red symbols “red 7” and “blue” which are the non-winning BB symbols are displayed. The frequency at which none of “7” is shown is 5/7, and the frequency at which any of “red 7” and “blue 7” is shown is 2/7 when free-handed. Thereby, when the BB symbol is shown on the left reel 301a, it is possible to increase the player's expectation.

  Next, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65, the stop operation of the middle reel 301b is performed after the left reel 301a is stopped. The stop control of the middle reel 301b will be described.

  A bell symbol located in the vicinity (specifically, above) of the BB symbol that can be won is shown in the upper part of the left reel 301a that is stopped and displayed, and the BB symbol that can win a prize is shown in the middle part. When the stop control of the reel 301b is performed, any one of the three-color bell symbols is placed on the upper stage and any one of the three-color BB symbols, regardless of the timing at which the middle reel 301b is stopped. Is controlled so that the middle reel 301b is stopped (special symbol display control means).

  For example, the result of the internal lottery is the number “29” shown in FIG. 65, and the white bell symbol with the array number 6 is shown in the upper part of the left reel 301a, and the white 7 with the array number 5 is shown in the middle part of the left reel 301b. When this is done, the stop control of the middle reel 301b is performed as follows.

  When the middle reel 301b is stopped at the timing when the replay of the array number 1 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the number of slips at this time is 1, and the “white bell” of the array number 4 Is shown in the upper row and “White 7” of SEQ ID NO: 3 is shown in the middle row. Further, when the operation of stopping the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when the cherry of the array number 5 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the number of slips at this time is 2, and the “blue” of the array number 9 “Bell” is shown in the upper row and “Blue 7” of SEQ ID NO: 8 is shown in the middle row. Further, when the operation of stopping the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when the blue bell of the array element number 12 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 3, as shown in FIG. “Red bell” is shown in the upper row, and “Red 7” of SEQ ID NO: 16 is shown in the middle row. In this way, when a BB symbol that can be won is shown in the middle stage of the left reel 301a, no matter what timing the stop operation of the middle reel 301b is performed, The bell symbol is tempered, and the BB symbol is tempered on the middle horizontal effective line L2 (the bell symbol and the BB symbol are double tempered). It should be noted that BB symbols that are not likely to win a prize (when the result of the internal lottery is the number “29” shown in FIG. 65, “Red 7” symbol and “Blue 7” symbol) are aligned at the timing when they are aligned on the active line. Even when the reel 301b is stopped, the bell symbol is tempered on the upper horizontal effective line L1, and the BB symbol is tempered on the middle horizontal effective line L2 (bell symbol and BB symbol). And double temper). As a result, not only can the player be expected for a long time, but also the stop operation of the third reel 301c becomes extremely hot, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  A bell symbol located in the vicinity of a non-winning BB symbol is shown in the upper stage of the left reel 301a displayed in a stopped state, and a non-winning BB symbol is shown in the middle stage, and when the left symbol is displayed in a stopped state. The reel 301a does not show any BB symbol, but when the bell symbol located in the vicinity of the BB symbol which cannot be won is shown in the lower row, the stop control of the middle reel 301b is performed. When this is done, no matter what timing the stop operation of the middle reel 301b is performed, any one of the three-color bell symbols is in the middle, and any one of the three-color BB symbols is in the lower stage. As shown, the stop control of the middle reel 301b is performed.

  For example, the result of the internal lottery is the number “29” shown in FIG. 65, and none of the three color BB symbols is displayed on the left reel 301a, and any of the three color bell symbols is displayed. When the bell symbol is shown in the lower stage, the stop control of the middle reel 301b is performed as follows. Also, the BB symbol that cannot be won is located in the middle stage (near the BB symbol that cannot be won (the upper is limited to the middle reel 301b, that is, the array number obtained by adding 1 to the BB symbol that cannot be won, the same applies hereinafter) When the bell symbol to be displayed is shown in the upper row), none of the three color BB symbols is shown on the left reel 301a, and one of the three color bell symbols is in the lower row. The stop control of the middle reel 301b is performed as in the case shown (game mode secret means). As a result, when the left reel 301a is stopped, the result of the internal lottery may indicate any game among the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65 (a combination of BB symbols). If the BB symbol that can be won is not shown in spite of being (game), the possibility of the combination of BB symbols appearing when the left reel 301a is stopped is eliminated. It is possible to avoid giving an unnecessary sense of expectation, and to reduce the discouragement that can be given to the player. That is, when an external operation is not performed at a timing when a specific BB symbol is displayed even though the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. In addition, it is possible to reduce the discouragement that can be given to the player by making it secret that the game is a game in which a combination of BB symbols may be revealed.

  When the operation of stopping the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 1 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the number of slips at this time is 2, and the “white bell” of the array number 4 Is shown in the middle. Further, when the operation of stopping the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when the cherry of array number 5 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 3, as shown in FIG. "Bell" is shown in the middle. Further, when the operation of stopping the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when the blue bell of the array element number 12 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 4, as shown in FIG. The “red bell” is shown in the middle. In this way, if the winning BB symbol is not shown in the middle stage of the left reel 301a, no matter what timing the stop operation of the middle reel 301b is performed (the non-winning BB symbol is on the active line) The bell symbol is always tempered on either the right-down effective line L4 or the right-up effective line L5 (even if the bell symbol only). Will be a single temper). Thereby, depending on the stop operation of each of the reels 301a to 301c, a game in which the combination of the BB symbols is shown on the active line (that is, the combination of the small role symbols is displayed even though the small role flag is in the winning state). Only when an external operation is performed at a timing at which it is avoided to be displayed on the active line, a timing at which a winning BB symbol is displayed in a game in which a combination of BB symbols is displayed on the active line) Even if the stop operation of the left reel 301a is not performed, it can be kept secret that the combination of BB symbols was a game that can be shown on the active line, and the discouragement given to the player Can be reduced.

  Next, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65, the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed after the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped. The stop control of the right reel 301c when performed will be described.

  It is avoided that the 26 bell symbol combinations corresponding to the small combinations for which the flag is established are displayed on the active line (the winning BB symbol is displayed on the active line) and the left reel 301a and When the BB symbol that can win a prize is tempered on the middle horizontal effective line L2 due to the stop operation of the middle reel 301b, the stop control of the right reel 301c is performed as follows (special symbol display). Control means).

  When the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at a timing at which it is avoided that the 26 bell symbol combinations corresponding to the small role for which the flag is established are aligned on the active line, if the inside is in the middle, a prize is won. The right reel 301c is controlled to be stopped so that the BB symbol that can be displayed is shown in the middle row. As a result, the symbol combination of BB is shown on the middle horizontal effective line L2, and a bonus winning is obtained. However, if the BB flag is in the general state where the winning is not established, the symbol combination of the loss is displayed on all the active lines.

  For example, the result of the internal lottery is the number “29” shown in FIG. 65, and the white bell symbol with the array number 6 is shown in the upper part of the left reel 301a, and the white 7 with the array number 5 is shown in the middle part of the left reel 301b. In addition, when the white bell design of array number 4 is shown in the upper stage of the middle reel 301b and the white bell of array number 3 is shown in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the stop control of the right reel 301c is as follows. To be done.

  When the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the symbol of array number 1 is in the lower stage, if it is inside, the number of slips at this time is 3, as shown in FIG. Four “white bells” are shown in the middle. However, if the BB flag is in the general state where the winning state is not established, switching to FIG. 68 (d) is made, and FIG. 68 (g) is referred to. Is displayed in the middle (that is, it is avoided that the symbol combination of BB is displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination of loss is displayed on all the active lines). When the right reel 301c is stopped at the timing when the watermelon with the array number 2 is in the lower stage in a state where the combination of the BB symbols may be revealed (the state where the BB symbols are tempered), As shown in 68 (d), the number of slips at this time is 2, and the “white bell” of SEQ ID NO: 4 is shown in the middle. However, if the BB flag is in the general state where the winning state is not established, switching to FIG. 68 (d) is made and FIG. 68 (g) is referred to. Is displayed in the middle (that is, it is avoided that the symbol combination of BB is displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination of loss is displayed on all the active lines). Also, when the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the white bell of the array number 3 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 1 as shown in FIG. “White 7” of SEQ ID NO: 5 is shown in the middle. However, if the BB flag is in the general state where the winning state is not established, switching to FIG. 68 (d) and referring to FIG. 68 (g), the number of slips at this time is 0, and the “replay” of array number 4 Is displayed in the middle (that is, it is avoided that the symbol combination of BB is displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination of loss is displayed on all the active lines). Furthermore, when the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 4 is in the lower stage, if it is inside, the number of slips at this time is 0 as shown in FIG. 68 (d), “White 7” of SEQ ID NO: 5 is shown in the middle. In this way, the symbol combination of BB is shown on the middle horizontal effective line L2, and a bonus winning is obtained. However, if the flag of BB is in the general state where the winning is not established, switching to FIG. 68 (d) and referring to FIG. 68 (g), the number of slips at this time is 2, ”Is displayed in the middle stage (that is, the symbol combination of BB is avoided to be displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination of loss is displayed on all the active lines). In this way, even if the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65, if the BB flag is not in the winning state, the bell corresponding to the non-overlapping flag Assume that the BB symbol located in the vicinity of the symbol (below if it is limited to the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b, that is, an arrangement number obtained by subtracting 1 from the arrangement number of the bell symbol) is tempered on the middle horizontal effective line L2. Also, the table that is referred to when the right reel 301c is stopped is changed. As a result, even if the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at a timing at which the 26 bell symbol combinations corresponding to the small role for which the flag is established are avoided from being aligned on the active line, the symbol of BB It is avoided that the combination is displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination of loss is displayed on all the active lines.

  In addition, although the BB symbol that can be won is shown in the middle stage on the left reel 301a, the BB symbol that cannot be won is shown in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b. If the BB symbol combination is not shown on any active line even if the stop operation is performed in (ie, when the bell symbol and the BB symbol that cannot win a prize are double-tempered), In addition, stop control of the right reel 301c is performed.

  Even if the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at any timing, the stop control of the right reel 301c is performed so that any one of the three-color bell symbols is displayed in the upper stage. The bell symbol combination is shown on the upper horizontal effective line L1, and one medal is paid out in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp.

  For example, the result of the internal lottery is the number “29” shown in FIG. 65, and the white bell symbol with the array number 6 is shown in the upper part of the left reel 301a, and the white 7 with the array number 5 is shown in the middle part of the left reel 301b. In addition, when the white bell design of array number 4 is shown in the upper stage of the middle reel 301b and the white bell of array number 3 is shown in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the stop control of the right reel 301c is as follows. To be done.

When the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 4 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 68 ( f ), the number of slips at this time is 1, and the “white bell” of the array number 7 Is shown in the upper row. When the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 6 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 68 ( f ), the number of slips at this time is 2, and the “blue bell” of the array number 10 (For SEQ ID NO: 10, the character shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to “blue bell”) is shown in the upper row. Further, when the watermelon SEQ ID NO: 9 performs stop operation of the right reel 301c at the timing in the lower, as shown in FIG. 68 (f), the slip number at this time is 3, "blue SEQ ID NO: 14 "Bell" is shown in the upper row. Further, when the blue 7 of SEQ ID NO: 12 performs a stop operation of the right reel 301c at the timing in the lower, as shown in FIG. 68 (f), the slip number at this time is 0, the SEQ ID NO: 14 ""Bluebell" is shown in the upper row. In this way, the bell symbol combination is shown on the upper horizontal effective line L1, and one medal is paid out in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp.

  Further, when no BB symbol that can win a prize is shown in any of the upper, middle, and lower tiers of the left reel 301a (that is, the effective line L4 that is lowered to the right without any BB symbol out of three BB symbols). When the bell symbol is tempered above), the stop control of the right reel 301c is performed as follows.

  Even if the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at any timing, the stop control of the right reel 301c is performed so that any one of the three-color bell symbols is displayed in the lower stage, and as a result The bell symbol combination is displayed on the effective line L4 that is lowered to the right, and one medal is paid out in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp.

  For example, the result of the internal lottery is the number “29” shown in FIG. 65, and the blue bell of the array number 13 is shown in the upper stage of the left reel 301a (at this time, the array number that is a BB symbol that cannot be won). 12 blue 7 is shown in the middle stage of the left reel 301b), when the white bell design number 4 is shown in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b (that is, the bell design is on the lower right effective line L4). The stop control of the right reel 301c is performed as follows.

When the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 4 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 68 ( e ), the number of slips at this time is 3, and the “white bell” of the array number 7 Is shown in the lower row. When the replay of SEQ ID NO: 6 perform stop operation of the right reel 301c at the timing in the lower, as shown in FIG. 68 (e), the slip number at this time is 1, SEQ ID NO: 7 "white bell" Is shown in the lower row. Further, when the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 11 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 3, as shown in FIG. "Bell" is shown in the bottom row. Furthermore, when the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the blue bell of the array number 15 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 2, as shown in FIG. "Blue bell" is shown in the lower part. In this way, the bell symbol combination is shown on the effective line L4 that is lowered to the right, and one medal is paid out in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp.

  If the result of the internal lottery is the number “31” shown in FIG. 65, even if the BB flag and the replay flag overlap, the replay is preferentially over the symbol combination of BB. The reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combination is shown on the active line. When the result of the internal lottery is the number “34” shown in FIG. 65, the replay symbol combination is always shown on the active line regardless of whether it is in the general state or inside. The reel stop control is performed. Hereinafter, stop control of each of the reels 301a to 301c when the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “31” and “34” illustrated in FIG. 65 will be described.

  When the left reel 301a is stopped, stop control of the left reel 301a is performed so that any one replay symbol corresponding to the timing of the stop operation is displayed on the upper stage or the lower stage. For example, when the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at the timing when the watermelon of SEQ ID NO: 1 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the left reel 301a slides two frames from the point when the stop operation is performed. 3 “Replay” is shown in the bottom row. Further, if the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at the timing when the watermelon with the array number 11 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 1, and the “replay” with the array number 14 is shown in the upper stage.

  Next, when the middle reel 301b is stopped, any one replay symbol corresponding to the timing of the stop operation is always shown in the middle stage (not shown in the upper stage or the lower stage). For example, when the stop operation of the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 1 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the middle reel 301b slides four frames from the time when the stop operation is performed. Six “Replays” are shown in the middle. Further, when the operation of stopping the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 10 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 3, and the “replay” of the array number 14 is displayed in the middle stage.

  Next, when the right reel 301c is stopped, if the replay symbol is on the right-down active line L4 (see FIG. 61), any one of the replays corresponding to the timing of the stop operation is displayed on the lower stage. If a symbol appears and the replay symbol is on the right-up effective line L5 (see FIG. 61), any one of the replay symbols corresponding to the timing of the stop operation is displayed on the upper stage. For example, if the replay symbol is tempered on the effective line L4 (see FIG. 61) that descends to the right, the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the replay of the array element number 4 is in the lower stage. As shown in FIG. 5, the number of slips at this time is 0, “Replay” of SEQ ID NO: 4 is shown in the lower stage, and the symbol combination of replay is shown on the lower right effective line L4 (see FIG. 61). The Also, if the replay symbol is on the right-up effective line L5 (see FIG. 61), the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the white 7 of the array element number 5 is in the lower stage, FIG. ), The number of slips at this time is 4, “Replay” of SEQ ID NO: 11 is shown in the upper stage, and the symbol combination of replay is shown on the effective line L5 (see FIG. 61) that goes up to the right. Is done.

  Thus, when the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “31” and “34” shown in FIG. 65, the replay symbol combination is always set regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the reels 301a to 301c. As shown in any of the right-down effective line L4 (see FIG. 61) and the right-up effective line L5 (see FIG. 61), stop control of the reels 301a to 301c is performed, and medals are inserted. A replay opportunity is given as a right to execute the next game without playing. Even if it is inside, the reel stop control is performed so that the replay symbol combination is shown on the active line with priority over the symbol combination of BB, so the result of the internal lottery is shown in FIG. The reel stop control in the case of any of the numbers “31” and “34” shown is the same regardless of whether it is in general or inside.

  When the result of the internal lottery is the number “32” shown in FIG. 65, even if the BB flag and the watermelon flag are overlapped, the watermelon is prioritized over the symbol combination of BB. The reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combination is shown on the active line. When the result of the internal lottery is the number “35” shown in FIG. 65, the combination of watermelon symbols is always shown on the active line regardless of whether it is in general or inside. The reel stop control is performed. Note that the stop control of the reels 301a to 301c when the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “32” and “35” shown in FIG. 65 is the number “31” shown in FIG. And “34”, the detailed description is omitted. In this way, the watermelon symbol combination is shown on either the right-down effective line L4 (see FIG. 61) or the right-up effective line L5 (see FIG. 61). Stop control is performed. When the watermelon symbol combination is shown on the active line, a medal as a prize is paid out.

  If the result of the internal lottery is the number “30” shown in FIG. 65, even if the BB flag and the cherry flag are duplicated, the cherry combination is given priority over the BB symbol combination. The reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combination is shown on the active line. When the result of the internal lottery is the number “33” shown in FIG. 65, the cherry symbol combination is always shown on the active line regardless of whether it is in the general or internal state. The reel stop control is performed. When the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “30” and “33” shown in FIG. 65, the cherry is shown in any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel 301a. Then, the stop control of the left reel 301a is performed, and a medal as a prize is paid out.

  When the result of the internal lottery is the number “36” shown in FIG. 65, if it is in general, no matter what timing the stop control of each reel 301a to 301c is performed, on all active lines, The symbol combination of loser is shown. On the other hand, if it is inside, as long as forward scissor push (left reel 301a → right reel 301c → middle reel 301b) is performed, the upper horizontal effective line L1, the lower horizontal effective line L3, the lower right effective line Regardless of the timing at which the reels 301a to 301c are stopped on any of L4 and the effective line L5 that rises to the right, stop control of the reels 301a to 301c is performed so that the symbol combination of BB is shown. Done. As a result, the symbol combination of BB is shown on the active line, and a bonus win is obtained.

  Specifically, when the left reel 301a is operated to stop, the upper or lower stage shows one of the three color BB symbols corresponding to the timing of the stop operation, so that the left reel 301a is displayed. Stop control is performed. For example, when the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at the timing when the watermelon of array number 1 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the left reel 301a slides two frames from the point of time when the stop operation is performed. “White 7” of 5 is shown in the upper part. Further, when the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at the timing when the watermelon of array number 11 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 1, and “blue 7” of array number 12 is displayed in the lower stage.

  Next, when the right reel 301c is stopped, the right reel 301c is stopped so that any one BB symbol corresponding to the timing of the stop operation among the three color BB symbols is always displayed in the upper or lower stage. Control is performed (not shown in the middle). For example, if the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the watermelon of array number 2 is in the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the right reel 301c slides one frame from the point of time when the stop operation is performed. Five “white bells” are shown in the upper row. When the stop operation of the right reel 301c is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 11 is in the lower stage, the number of slips at this time is 1, and the “blue bell” of the array number 12 is displayed in the lower stage.

  When the middle reel 301b is finally stopped, the middle reel 301b is controlled to be stopped as follows.

  If the BB symbol is displayed on the upper horizontal effective line L1 (see FIG. 61), any one of the three color BB symbols corresponding to the timing of the stop operation is displayed in the upper row. In addition, the stop control of the middle reel 301b is performed. For example, when the operation of stopping the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when the cherry of the array number 7 is in the lower stage in a state where the BB symbol is tempered on the upper horizontal effective line L1, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), The middle reel 301b slides two frames from the time when the stop operation is performed, the “blue bell” of the array number 11 is shown in the upper stage, and the symbol combination of BB is shown on the upper horizontal effective line L1.

  In addition, if the BB symbol is on the lower horizontal effective line L3 (see FIG. 61), one of the three BB symbols corresponding to the timing of the stop operation is displayed in the lower row. Thus, the stop control of the middle reel 301a is performed. For example, when the operation of stopping the middle reel 301b is performed at the timing when the replay of the array number 6 is in the lower stage in a state where the BB symbol is tempered on the lower horizontal effective line L3, as shown in FIG. The number of slips at this time is two, “blue bell” of array number 8 is shown in the lower stage, and the symbol combination of BB is shown on the lower horizontal effective line L3.

  Furthermore, if the BB symbol is on the right-down effective line L4 (see FIG. 61) or the right-up effective line L5 (see FIG. 61), it depends on the timing of the stop operation of the three color BB symbols. Further, stop control of the middle reel 301b is performed so that any one BB symbol is shown in the middle stage. That is, the BB symbol is displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 301c in either the state where the BB symbol is tempered on the lower right effective line L4 or the state where the BB symbol is tempered on the upper right effective line L5. Then, the symbol combination of BB is displayed on the active line. For example, when the BB symbol is tempered on the lower right effective line L4, or when the BB symbol is tempered on the upper right effective line L5, for example, the timing at which the replay of SEQ ID NO: 6 is in the lower stage When the operation of stopping the middle reel 301b is performed, as shown in FIG. 70 (e), the number of slips at this time is 1, and the “blue bell” of the array number 8 is displayed in the middle stage, and is moved upward. The symbol combination of BB is shown on the effective line L4 or the effective line L5 which is descending to the right.

  In this way, when the result of the internal lottery is “36” shown in FIG. 65, the reels 301a to 301a at any timing can be used as long as the reels 301a to 301c are stopped by pushing forward scissors. Even if the stop operation 301c is performed, the BB symbol combination is displayed on the active line. Thereby, the excitement of the player is enhanced at the time when the stop operation of each of the reels 301a to 301c is urged by pushing the scissors, and the decrease in the interest is suppressed.

  By the way, as described above, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of the numbers “3” to “29” shown in FIG. 65, the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at the timing when the winning BB symbol is displayed. If the BB symbol that can win a prize is displayed on the active line, but the stop operation of the left reel 301a is not performed at the timing when the BB symbol that can win a prize is shown, rarely a BB symbol that cannot be won. May appear on the active line. In addition, when the result of the internal lottery is one of the numbers “1” and “2” shown in FIG. 65, the BB symbol combination is not shown on the active line, but the BB of three colors Any BB symbol may be shown on the active line. Therefore, at the stage where the BB symbol is displayed on the effective line when the left reel 301a is stopped, the combination of the BB symbol may be displayed on the effective line, but the combination of the BB symbol is effective. The expectations expressed above are not very high.

  Then, after the left reel 301a is stopped and the BB symbol is displayed on the active line, the BB symbol that can win the middle reel 301b can be displayed on the active line because the result of the internal lottery is shown in FIG. And the BB symbol shown on the left reel 301a is a BB symbol that can be won (in this embodiment, the left reel BB symbol can be shown only in the middle stage of 301a). In other words, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b is shown only when the bell figure located in the vicinity of the BB symbol that can be won is shown in the upper stage of the left reel 301a and the BB symbol that can be won is shown in the middle stage of the left reel 301a. In addition, any one of the BB symbols of the three colors can be represented. At this time, the upper stage of the middle reel 301b is a bell design located in the vicinity (up one) of the BB design shown in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b. Therefore, both the bell design combination and the BB design combination are included. This leaves the possibility of being displayed on the active line (becomes a double tempering state of the bell symbol and the BB symbol). Thus, at the stage where the bell symbol and the BB symbol are in the double tempering state, the combination of the BB symbols is more effective than the stage where the BB symbol is displayed on the active line when the left reel 301a is stopped. The expectation shown above is enhanced (expectation amplifying means). Thereby, whenever the stop operation of each reel 301a-301c is performed within one game, the expectation that the combination of the BB symbols is shown on the effective line is increased step by step, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to win with high probability any one of the numbers “3” to “29” and “36” shown in FIG. 65 in the internal lottery in the normal state (for example, 1000 yen) In the game that can be executed with a unit amount, there is a chance that the BB symbol combination can be shown on the active line depending on the stop operation of each of the reels 301a to 301c). Therefore, a game where there is no possibility that the BB symbol combination is displayed on the active line as in the conventional slot machine is suppressed, and a game that feels tired that continues indefinitely is suppressed. Makes it possible to play a game with the expectation that the combination of BB symbols is shown on the active line. Further, even when a game within one game is viewed, the expectation can be increased step by step each time the reels 301a to 301c are stopped.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table method. In addition to this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this, a specific description is omitted here. In this embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be determined as appropriate when constructing the control program.

[Determination process]
When the reel stop processing is completed, whether or not the winning combination symbols are arranged on any active line in the symbol display window 401 (whether the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed) or not. Make a decision. In FIG. 71, the content of this determination process is demonstrated concretely.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop process, the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the active lines from the stop eye form in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination) It is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols to be displayed is displayed. It should be noted that the stop eye particularly when all the reels are in a stopped state is sometimes referred to as an outcome.

  In steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether the current gaming state is an RB game or a BB game. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and OFF state (= 0) of game state flags, which will be described later, an RB game flag and a BB game flag.

  If the RB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S301 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S380. If the BB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S302 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S370.

  If both the RB game flag and the BB game flag are OFF (= 0), the determinations in steps S301 and S302 are not satisfied, and the winning combination symbols on one of the active lines are matched. Then, the process proceeds to any of the following steps S310, S320, S330, S340, and S350.

  In step S310, it is determined whether the BB symbol combinations are available. If the BB symbol combination is aligned on any of the active lines, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S312.

  In the next step S312, a BB game start process is executed. Here, as a BB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games where medals can be easily obtained is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S320, it is determined whether RB symbols are available. If RB symbols are aligned on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S322. In the present embodiment, explanation of RB is omitted, but the processing is generally performed.

  In the next step S322, an RB game start process is executed. Here, as an RB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games in which medals can be easily obtained according to the BB game is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S330, it is determined whether bell symbols are prepared. If the bell symbols are aligned on any of the active lines (“bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol”, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S336, where a specified number of medals are paid out (medal The specified number of medals are paid out from the discharge device 110. Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). However, since the bell is positioned as a quasi-losing as described above, it is not necessary to notify that the medal has been paid out.

  In step S338, the bell winning flag is set to OFF (= 0), and the process ends.

  In step S340, it is determined whether the cherry symbols are prepared. When the cherry symbols are aligned on the active line (“cherry symbol-ANY-ANY”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S342.

  In the next step S342, a prescribed number of medals are paid out (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the medal payout number is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). Thereby, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small role (cherry) has been paid out.

  In step S344, the cherry winning flag is set to OFF (= 0), and the process ends.

  In step S350, it is determined whether replay symbols are available. When the replay symbols are aligned on any of the active lines (“replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S352.

  In the next step S352, a replay game process is executed. In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay.

  In step S354, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0), and the process ends.

  If none of the winning combination symbols are on the active line, none of the determinations in steps S310, S320, S330, S340, and S350 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S360. Note that the outcome at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (disjoint pattern combination mode)”.

  In step S360, a losing process is executed. In this losing process, when the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is a winning flag other than BB and RB, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the loss flag is ON (= 1)), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  Therefore, if the winning flag does not correspond to either the BB winning flag or the RB winning flag, “missing” is determined at this point. In the slot machine 1, there is no winning combination in which this “missing” occurs, but a winning combination that may cause “missing” may be included in the small role or the like.

  On the other hand, when the winning flag corresponds to either the BB winning flag or the RB winning flag, the winning flag is not turned OFF and is carried over after the next game. As a result, the winning flag is carried over until the corresponding winning combination symbols can be aligned without causing any loss of BB and RB. Therefore, the player can play the game with a sense of security that BB and RB game benefits can be obtained without worrying about losing a winning role with higher profitability than other winning roles such as BB and RB. You can face it. In particular, for a player with a low level of skill, the practice of pressing can be repeated any number of times until the BB symbol combinations (or RB symbol combinations) are aligned.

  The processes from step S303 to step S360 are executed in the normal state. Next, the processing after step S370 will be described. The process here is a process executed in the BB game and the RB game.

  First, in step S370, it is determined whether or not the BB game payout symbols are available. The “BB game payout” here is a collective term for winning combinations in which medals are paid out during the BB game. Then, when the BB game payout symbols are arranged on any active line (for example, “replay symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol”, “cherry symbol-ANY-ANY”, or “replay symbol—7 symbol) -Watermelon symbol "), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S372.

  In the next step S372, a prescribed number of medals are paid out in accordance with the BB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the BB game payout combination has been paid out. )

  Following step S372, in step S374, a BB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later), and the determination process ends.

  If the determination in step S370 is not satisfied, the process moves to step 378, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). In particular, in this example, since no omission occurs, the lost flag corresponds to the establishment flag. That is, in step S378, the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  Next, step S380 and subsequent steps will be described. In step S380, it is determined whether or not the RB game payout symbols are available. This “RB game payout” is also a collective term for winning combinations that have a payout during the RB game, similar to the above-mentioned BB game payout. If there are RB game payout symbols on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S382.

  In the next step S382, a predetermined number of medals are paid out in accordance with the RB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the RB game payout combination has been paid out. )

  Following step S382, in step S384, an RB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later), and the determination process ends.

  If the determination in step S380 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 378 described above, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). Since this is as described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

[BB game start processing]
If the above-described determination in step S310 in FIG. 71 is satisfied, a BB game start process is executed. This BB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether the BB flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the BB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the BB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the BB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the BB game is started with the same 3 betting (3) as in the game in the normal state.

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where BB symbol combinations are aligned even though the BB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LEDs.

[BB game end determination process]
Subsequently, the BB game end determination process in step S374 of FIG. 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S372 of FIG. 71 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the BB game.

  In step S452, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number has exceeded 300. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, where the cumulative payout number during the BB game is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612, etc. Note that the cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this). If the determination in step S452 is satisfied, the process moves to step S460.

  In step S460, the BB game in-progress flag is turned OFF (= 0), and the BB game end determination process is ended.

[RB game start processing]
If the determination in step S320 of FIG. 71 is satisfied, an RB game start process is executed. The RB game start process will be described with reference to FIG. In the slot machine of the present embodiment, explanation of RB is omitted, so that it will be explained as an example of a general RB game.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether the RB flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S501 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, the RB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the RB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. In step S506, the cumulative payout number count during the RB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the RB game is started with the same number of 3 bets (3) as in the game in the normal state. As a result, the player can play the game without feeling special discomfort compared to the game in the normal state.

  If the determination in step S501 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S502, and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where RB symbols are aligned even though the RB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LEDs.

[RB game end determination processing]
Subsequently, the RB game end determination process in step S384 of FIG. 71 will be described with reference to FIG. In the slot machine of the present embodiment, explanation of RB is omitted, so that it will be explained as an example of a general RB game.

  First, in step S551, in response to the payout of medals in step S382 of FIG. 71 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the RB game.

  In step S552, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number has exceeded 100. If the determination in step S552 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S554 to display the cumulative payout number in the RB game (displayed on the payout number display LED 612. The cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this).

  If the determination in step S552 is satisfied, the process moves to step S556.

  In step S556, after the RB game flag is set to OFF (= 0), the RB game end determination process is ended.

[Direction control]
The above is an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various effect operations are controlled by the effect control board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the effect control board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118) based on various commands (information command, output signal) output from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 409 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such effect modes are stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the production mode includes a game completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single production mode), a game performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Among these, the single-shot effect mode includes an effect that suggests the winning flag (implying effect, notification effect, details will be described later), an effect that informs the payout of medals (it may be an aspect that notifies the payout appearance and the number of payouts). There is.

  The suggestion effect is different from the effect (notification effect) that directly informs the player of the winning flag, that is, an effect that indirectly informs the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. In other words, a display that expresses a color or the like is performed. The suggestion effect is also performed when the winning flag is not present (that is, when the game is lost). In the case of a loss of number “36” in FIG. 65, as long as the BB is in a winning state, the “7” symbol combination is on the active line no matter what timing the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped. Will be aligned.

  For example, in the case of the small role of numbers “3” to “29” in FIG. 65, the announcement effect clearly indicates which winning role the player has won in the game, such as “Bell confirmation”. It can be done. This effect is more effective when it is executed for a winning combination that is particularly pleasing to the player such as the above-mentioned lose (because a winning combination of “7” symbol combination is confirmed and a large number of medals can be obtained if lost). That is, when the winning of the “7” symbol combination is confirmed, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate it.

  Moreover, as a continuous production | presentation aspect, there exist some which respond | correspond to game states, such as a BB game, in a normal state. These are clarifications about the game state, and the player performs these effects (continuous effects) to determine whether the current game state is in the normal state or not. It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is inside.

  The effect modes described above can be executed as image display by the image display body 500, generation of sound effects by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like. Such a production mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression when the player continues the game for a long time. The production mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, or the like. For example, instead of the image display 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, dolls imitating characters, movable models, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at different positions from each reel, and can be started and stopped regardless of player operations as part of the production. It is also possible to provide various effects by providing illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp). By adopting such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

  By the way, the following technical idea can be extracted from the gaming machine described in the above-described embodiment (the best mode for carrying out the invention).

[Technology 1]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 is
Three or more rotating display bodies to which at least a plurality of grand prize symbols and a plurality of small role symbols are attached;
A lottery means for performing a lottery for the establishment of one or more flags among a plurality of flags;
Stop operation means provided corresponding to the three or more rotation display bodies, each of the three or more rotation display bodies in the rotation display state can be individually stopped by an external operation;
Table storage means for storing a plurality of slip tables set with slip information based on a flag in a winning establishment state and a timing at which the external operation is performed;
Stop control means for performing stop control of the rotary display body based on any one of the plurality of slip tables, so that a symbol combination corresponding to the flag in the winning establishment state is displayed;
In accordance with a combination of symbols straddling the three or more rotation display bodies displayed in a stopped manner, a prize granting means for giving a prize as a result of one game;
A grand prize period generating means for generating a grand prize period in which a game to which the award can be given is performed over a plurality of games based on the fact that any one of the combinations of the grand prize symbols corresponding to the grand prize flag is expressed;
A normal winning inducing means for allowing the game to proceed while the grand prize period can always occur by always setting the grand prize flag to a winning establishment state, even though the game medium is gradually decreasing as the game progresses. With
The lottery means, in order to avoid frequent occurrence of the grand prize period in the gradually decreasing game state, the lottery flag corresponding to the combination of the small role symbols that can be always expressed, a lottery that can further win the winning state As well as
The everlasting means is
Only when the external operation is performed at a timing at which the combination combination of the small role symbols is avoided even though the small role flag is in a winning state, a specific grand prize symbol among the plurality of grand prize symbols. By displaying the combination of the award period, the award period possible game can occur,
A grand prize period non-occurrence game in which a combination of the small role symbols is always shown so that the grand prize period does not occur,
The stop control means includes
In the game that can occur during the grand prize period,
Even if both the grand prize symbol and the small role symbol are expressed based on the external operation performed on the first rotation display body among all the rotation display bodies in the rotation display state, If the displayed grand prize symbol is not the specific grand prize symbol,
When at least the first rotation display body is in the stop display state and the two or more rotation display bodies are in the rotation display state among all the rotation display bodies, among the two or more rotation display bodies Even if the external operation is performed at a timing at which both of the grand prize symbol and the small role symbol can be displayed on the second rotary display body which is any one of the rotational display bodies, the game is caused to occur in the grand prize period. To keep it a secret game,
The slip is always left so that only the possibility of the combination of the small symbol symbol among the combination of the grand prize symbol and the combination of the small symbol symbol remains when all the rotating display bodies are in the stop display state. Based on a secret secret table which is one of the tables, a game mode secret secret means for performing stop control of the second rotation display body is provided.

  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes three or more rotary display bodies (reels 301a to 301c) and lottery means (step S3 which is processing by the main control board 409). Each of the three rotating display bodies is provided with a plurality of types of grand prize symbols (BB symbols) and a plurality of types of small role symbols (bell symbols), and the lottery means can select one or more of a plurality of flags. The lottery related to the winning of the flag is performed. Corresponding to the plurality of rotation display bodies, stop operation means (reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) capable of individually stopping each of the plurality of rotation display bodies in the rotation display state by an external operation are also provided. I have. Then, stop control of the rotation display body is performed based on the flag in the winning establishment state and the timing when the external operation is performed, and according to the combination of symbols straddling the plurality of rotation display bodies that are stopped and displayed, The resulting award can be awarded by award awarding means (step S7 which is processing by the main control board 409). It should be noted that the stop control of the plurality of rotating display bodies is based on any one of the plurality of slip tables so that the symbol combination corresponding to the flag in the winning state is displayed (displayed on the active line). This is performed by stop control means (step S5 which is processing by the main control board 409). The slip table is stored in table storage means (ROM built in a main control MPU as a microprocessor provided in the main control board 409).

  And, the symbol combination that straddles the three or more rotating display bodies is one of the combinations of the plural types of grand prize symbols corresponding to the special role flag (hereinafter referred to as “special flag (BB flag)”). When stop control is performed so as to obtain a combination of symbols, a grand prize period (BB game) is created by the grand prize period generating means (step S312 which is processing by the main control board 409). The grand prize period is a period in which a game to which a prize can be awarded is performed over a plurality of games. When this grand prize period occurs, a large number of prizes are awarded to the player. In the above gaming machine, as a game medium, for example, a medal (a medal is an example and may be a pachinko ball) is used in a game, and a normal state in which no grand prize period has occurred, the game machine progresses. When the game medium gradually decreases (hereinafter, the normal state is referred to as a “gradual decrease game state”) and the grand prize period occurs, a medal as a game medium is given to the player as the prize during the grand prize period. Will frequently occur, so the game media will gradually increase.

  By the way, a player who plays a game on this type of gaming machine plays a game with the goal of showing a combination of grand prize symbols as a premise that the grand prize period will occur. If the special flag is not established, there is no indication. However, in the lottery by the lottery means, the game is generally started by operating the start lever after the game medium is inserted. That is, when the start lever is operated, it is already determined whether or not a combination of grand prize symbols will be displayed in the game, and there is no expectation for the player in a game where the special flag is not won. You will have to play a meaningless game. Furthermore, since the probability that a special flag is won in a lottery by lottery means is generally kept low, such meaningless games may continue indefinitely. It will be a hard work for the person.

  Therefore, in the above gaming machine, the grand prize period can always occur by allowing the special flag to be in the winning state even though the game medium gradually decreases as the game progresses. The game is provided with a regular victory inducing means (main control board 409 as a normal state control means) for advancing the game. That is, since the player always plays the game while there is a possibility that the grand prize period may occur, it is suppressed that the player has to play a meaningless game endlessly. “Always allow the special flag to be in the winning state” means that the special flag is in the winning state in most games in the gradually decreasing game state. For example, a unit quantity of games When a medium (for example, 50 medals) is lent, the winning probability of the special flag is set so that the special flag is won within the number of games that can be executed with the unit number of game media. This is the case.

  However, even if the special flag is won, if the combination of the grand prize symbols is easily expressed, the grand prize period will occur frequently, which is not realistic. Therefore, in the above gaming machine, various measures are taken in order to avoid frequent occurrence of the grand prize period in the gradually decreasing game state. Specifically, first, a lottery is performed by the lottery means so that the special flag (BB flag) and the small role flag (small role flag) are overlapped and the winning combination is likely to be established. In addition, when the special flag and the small role flag are overlapped and the winning state is established, the stop control of the plurality of rotation display bodies by the stop control means is a small role symbol corresponding to the small role flag rather than the combination of the grand prize symbols. (For example, a combination of bell symbols) is preferentially shown. In other words, even if the stop control is performed at a timing at which both the combination of the small role symbols and the combination of the grand prize symbols can be expressed, the stop control of the rotary display body is performed so that only the combination of the small role symbols is expressed. Is called.

  And in the gradual reduction game state, the combination of the small role symbols is always shown so that the grand prize period does not occur (the numbers “1”, “2” and “30” shown in FIG. 65 as a result of the internal lottery). -A game in which any one of “35” is extracted) and when the external operation is performed at the timing when the combination of the small role symbols is avoided even though the small role flag is in the winning state. In this case, a combination of a specific grand prize symbol among a plurality of types of grand prize symbols is shown, so that a grand prize period-probable game (numbers “3” to “3” shown in FIG. 65 as a result of an internal lottery) can occur. 29 ”and“ 36 ”from which one of“ 36 ”is extracted).

  By the way, there have been game machines such as stock machines and AT machines in the past, but such game machines can be awarded a large amount of game media in a short time, so there is not only a risk for pachinko halls, It was unfavorable because he would give greed to others. In this regard, according to the above gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a reduction in gambling while avoiding that a large amount of game media is awarded as a prize in a short time (the occurrence of a grand prize period frequently occurs in a short time). Can do. In other words, in most games in the gradual decrease game state, the special flag is set to the winning establishment state, and in the gradual decrease game state, the grand prize period non-occurrence game and the grand prize period possible game can be executed. While avoiding frequent occurrence of periods, it is possible for a player to play a game with the expectation that a combination of grand prize symbols will always be expressed.

  Note that the grand prize period non-occurrence game and the grand prize period possible game are executed, for example, by configuring them as follows. First, a plurality of grand prize symbols and a plurality of types (for example, three types) of small role symbols are attached to the respective rotary display bodies at positions where the rotary display bodies are displayed at any timing. Yes. In addition, a small role flag is associated with each combination of these plural types of small role symbols (for example, 27 combinations if there are three small role symbols). In other words, when all the flags corresponding to the combination of multiple types of small role symbols are won, the rotation display body is controlled to stop at any timing regardless of whether or not the special flag is won. Even so, a combination of small symbols is shown.

  If a special flag is won and only a part (for example, one) of all the flags corresponding to the combination of multiple types of small role symbols is not won, Only when the rotation display body stop control is performed at the timing at which the display of the combination of the small role symbols corresponding to the established flag is avoided, the combination of the grand prize symbols is displayed in the slip table. The rotation display body is controlled to stop based on a grand prize winning table (for example, FIGS. 68 (a), (b) and (d)). However, if only some flags among all the small role flags corresponding to combinations of multiple types of small role symbols are not won, the combination of small role symbols corresponding to the winning flag is displayed. Even if the rotation display body stop control is performed at the timing at which is avoided, the combination of the grand prize symbols is not shown if the special flag is not established.

  Under these circumstances, a game in which a special flag and all the flags corresponding to combinations of multiple types of small roles are duplicated and won is a game that is not a grand prize period (a special flag is won) Is not required). On the other hand, the special flag and all the small role symbols except for some small role symbols among all the flags corresponding to combinations of multiple types of small role symbols are won. The game that can occur during the grand prize period.

  In the grand prize period-probable game, the grand prize symbol and the small role symbol are displayed based on an external operation performed on the first rotary display body (left reel 301a) among all the rotational display bodies in the rotational display state. Even if both are displayed, if the displayed grand prize symbol is not a specific grand prize symbol, the other rotary display bodies (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) in the rotational display state are as follows. ) Stop control is performed. The specific grand prize symbol is a grand prize symbol that constitutes a combination of grand prize symbols that can be expressed in the grand prize period occurrence game.

  That is, at least the first rotation display body (the left reel 301a) among all the rotation display bodies is in the stop display state, and two or more rotation display bodies (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) are in the rotation display state. At a certain time, with respect to the second rotation display body (medium reel 301b) which is one of the two or more rotation display bodies, both the grand prize symbol and the small role symbol can be displayed. Even if an external operation is performed, stop control is performed to conceal that the game is a game that can occur during the grand prize period.

  Specifically, only when there is always a possibility that the combination of the small role symbols will be expressed among the combination of the grand prize symbols and the combination of the small role symbols when all the rotating display bodies are in the stop display state. On the other hand (that is, only the small role symbol is tempered), the second rotation display body stop control is performed based on a secret back table (for example, the table of FIG. 68C) which is one of the slide tables. Aspects are performed by secret means. As a result, when the first rotation display body is stopped, the first rotation display body is stopped if a specific grand prize symbol is not shown in spite of the grand prize period possible game. By eliminating the possibility that the combination of award symbols will be revealed at the time, it is possible to avoid giving the player an unnecessary sense of expectation and, in turn, reducing the disappointment that can be given to the player. That is, if an external operation is not performed at the timing when a specific grand prize symbol is displayed in spite of being a game that can occur during the grand prize period, it is confidential that the game was a game that can occur during the grand prize period. Therefore, the discouragement that can be given to the player can be reduced.

  The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. For example, in the above embodiment, the slot machine has been described. However, a gaming machine other than the slot machine, for example, a pachinko ball take-in type gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused (that is, a pachinko ball is used). The present invention is applied to a gaming machine in which a reel is rotated by being taken into the machine by a take-in device and a winning combination is determined by a combination of symbols stopped by stopping the rotating reel. be able to. Such a gaming machine is basically a gaming machine similar to a slot machine except that a pachinko ball is inserted. According to the above embodiment, the medal to be paid out when the bell wins is preferably the smallest unit, but the pachinko ball generally has a lower gaming value than the medal (one fifth of the medal is common). The above invention is more preferably applied to a pachinko ball take-in and spinning machine.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door-shaped front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door-shaped front member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part in FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part in FIG. 4 showing a state where a connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of Fig.8 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is a disassembled perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the symbol variation display apparatus which shows the other form of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relationship between a case member and the stopper of the outer main body side. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and the reel of a design variation display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lower half portion of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 25. It is the rear view which looked at the heat radiation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-section partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up at the power supply device from the bottom. It is a principal part sectional drawing of the side plate of an outer main part, and a power supply device which shows another form. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which decomposes | disassembles and shows a transparent plate. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 32A-A of the door-shaped front member equipped with a transparent plate. It is a disassembled / assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain | linkage of a hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. It is a principal part crossing top view of the door-shaped front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. It is a block diagram of the main control board arranged at the game unit side and the main relay board arranged at the main body side. It is a block diagram of the main control board and the peripheral control board which are arranged on the game unit side. It is a block diagram of a peripheral control board arranged on the game unit side and a peripheral relay board arranged on the main body side. It is a front view of the main relay board | substrate and periphery relay board | substrate accommodated in a wiring relay member. It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by the number of pins of connectors CN1, CN4, CN5, CN6 and CN7 of the main relay board and each pin. It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by the number of pins of connector CN3 of a main relay board | substrate, and each pin. It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by the number of pins of connector CN2 of a main relay board | substrate, and each pin. It is a figure which shows the number of pins of connector CN1 of a main control board, and the signal transmitted by each pin. Number of pins of connector CN3 of peripheral control board and signals transmitted by each pin, number of pins of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board and signals transmitted by each pin, and number of pins of connector CN2 and connector CN3 of peripheral relay board It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by each pin. It is a rear view of the door-shaped front member of the slot machine. It is a perspective view of the door board | substrate storage case arrange | positioned at the back surface of a door-shaped front member. It is a simple circuit diagram of a door decoration drive board. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the output sequence of serial data. It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by the number of pins of each connector by connector CN4 and connector CN5 of a main control board, and connectors CN1 and CN2 of a peripheral control board, and each pin. It is a time chart which shows the on-off timing of each signal in the command transmission from the main control board in this embodiment to a peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows a part of command output process which main CPU of a main control board performs. Fig. 58 is a continuation of the flowchart of Fig. 57. It is a flowchart of the SEL interruption process which sub CPU of a peripheral control board performs. It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process which the sub CPU of a peripheral control board performs. It is a figure which shows the winning line visually recognized through the transparent board 214a. FIG. 3 is a development view in which a symbol array of a reel band is developed in a plane. It is a flowchart which shows the basic 1 game processing procedure in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a starting process. It is a hit value determination table of extracted random values in general. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a reel stop process. 65 is a slide table related to reel stop control when the result of the internal lottery is the number “1” or “2” shown in FIG. 65, and (a) the slide table for the left reel, and (b) the left reel 3 only. (C) Sliding table for the right reel when the bell symbol is shown on the lower right effective line when the left reel and the middle reel are in the stopped state. (D) A slide table for the right reel when the bell symbol is shown on the effective line rising to the right when the left reel and the middle reel are in a stopped state. 65 is a slip table for the reel stop control when the result of the internal lottery is No. 29 shown in FIG. 65, (a) the slide table for the left reel, and (b) only the left reel is in the stopped state. (C) Slide table for the middle reel when the bonus symbol is shown on the left reel at a certain time, (c) About the middle reel when the bonus symbol is not shown on the left reel when only the left reel is stopped Slide table, (d) Slide table for right reel when white 7 is tempered when left reel and middle reel are stopped and BB flag is in a winning state, (e) Left reel and middle reel are When in the stopped state, the symbol shown on the middle reel is shown as red 7 or blue 7, and the bonus symbol is displayed as a template. (F) Sliding table for the right reel when the white 7 is not tempered when the left reel and the middle reel are in a stopped state, and (g) the left reel 301a and the middle reel. This is a slip table for the right reel 301c when the “white 7” symbol is tempered when the 301b is in the stopped state and the BB flag is not in the winning state. 65 is a slide table related to reel stop control when the result of the internal lottery is the number 31 or 34 shown in FIG. 65, where (a) the slide table for the left reel and (b) only the left reel is in the stopped state. (C) Sliding table for the right reel when the replay is shown on the right-down active line when the left reel and the middle reel are in a stopped state, (d) the left reel The slide table for the right reel when the replay is shown on the right-up active line when the middle reel is in the stopped state. 65 is a slide table related to reel stop control when the result of the internal lottery is the number 36 shown in FIG. 65, where (a) the slide table for the left reel and (b) only the left reel is in the stopped state. Sliding table for right reel at a certain time, (c) Sliding table for middle reel when BB symbol is tempered on upper horizontal effective line when left reel and right reel are stopped, (d) Left The slide table for the middle reel when the BB symbol is tempered on the lower horizontal effective line when the reel and the right reel are in the stopped state. (E) The BB symbol is displayed when the left and right reels are in the stopped state. This is a slide table for a middle reel when it is tempered on an effective line that goes up or down to the right. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a BB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a BB game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a RB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of RB game completion | finish determination processing.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine 50 Model unit 80 Connecting tool 90 Front opening / closing member 100a Rotating shaft 100 Outer main body 101 Bottom plate 102a Convex part 102b Guard part 102 Side plate 103 Top plate 104 Back plate 104a Heat radiation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection step 107 Mounting piece 108 Mounting piece 109 Opening 110 Medal paying device 110a Device body 110b Hopper 110c Release port 110d Overflow passage 111 Medal auxiliary storage box 111a Medal auxiliary storage switch 112 Power supply device 112a Device case 112b Top plate 112c Rear plate 112d Front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg portion 112i Vent space 112j Stepped portion 112k Mounting piece 112m Projection portion 112p Through hole 112q Wood screw 112r Bottom plate 112s Power supply board 113 Relay member 114 boss hole 115 rail member 116 rail member 117 stopper 118 fitting 119 body wirelines 120 mounting plate 121 cover body 122 main relay board Connector board (large)
123 Peripheral Relay Board [Connector Board (Small)]
124 connector (main relay connector)
125 connector (peripheral relay connector)
126 Opening 127 Opening 128 Supporting tube 129 Wiring duct 130 Wiring stopper 131 External relay terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent hole 200 Door-type front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 201a L speaker 201b R speaker 202 Operation unit 203 Input port 205 1 Bet button 206 MAX bet button 207 Medal selector 208 Medal return button 210 Start lever 211a Reel stop button 211b Reel stop button 211c Reel stop button 212 Medal bag 213 Return bar 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 215c Stop release / error release switch 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitter 217b Reflective member 217A Left light emitter Door side decorative light emitter)
217B Right light emitter (door-side decorative light emitter)
217C Upper light emitter (door decorative light emitter)
218 Fixing member 219 Groove 220 Door open detection switch 221 Bass speaker 230 Design plate 300 Design variation display device 301a Reel 301b Reel 301c Reel 302 Device case 303 Driving means 303a Reel motor 303b Reel motor 303c Reel motor 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate 306 Right side plate 307 Left side plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel main relay board 313 Cable 314 Belt thread 315 Retaining part 316 Lower handle 317 Reel peripheral relay board 400 Case member 401 Opening 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide unit 403 Floor plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main control board (game control board)
410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave step 413 Tapered part 414 Wheel 415 416 Hook part 417 Empty space 418 Temporary fixing shelf 419 Recess 420 Hinge bracket 420a Fixing member 420b Rotating member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Superposition area 420h Superposition area 420i Pin hole 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle port 423 Game unit side wiring 424 Harness 425 connector (connector for main control system wiring connection)
426 Harness 427 Connector (Connector for peripheral control system wiring connection)
427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle 430 Through hole 431 Mounting piece 432 Button-shaped panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Inward claw piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 439 Cable stopper 440 Guide rail 441 Function separation relay terminal plate 442 Locking hole 443 Skylight portion 444 Reinforcement band 450 Game state display substrate 500 Image display body 500a Liquid crystal inverter substrate 500b 15.9 Liquid crystal module 500c Fan motor 501 Frame member 502 Illumination device 503a Reel illumination LED board (top)
503b Reel illumination LED board (bottom)
504 Light-emitting diode 505 Translucent cover plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving unit 509 Engaging unit 600 Upper rail 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 700 Connecting tool 701 Fixed sheath member 702 Rod 703 Stopping shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Pick piece 750 Peripheral control board (sub control board)
800 Door board storage case 801 Door decoration drive board storage part 802 Main door relay board storage part 803 Storage case cover 850 Main door relay board 851 Medal selector connection connector 852 Storage medal settlement button connection connector 853 MAX bet button connection connector 854 1-bet button connection connector 855 Start-lever connection connector 856 Reel stop button connection connector 857 Connection connector 858 for batting release / error release switch to main body connection connector member [CN1 (30 pins)]
859 Paired connector connector [CN1 (20 pins)]
860 Door decorative drive board 860a Select circuit 860b Switch circuit 860c Drive circuit 861 Top decorative board connection connector 862 Upper left decorative board connection connector 863 Left lower decorative board connection connector 864 Upper right decorative board connection connector 865 Right lower decorative board connection connector 866 Lower panel illumination lighting board connection connector 867 L speaker connection connector 868 R speaker connection connector 871 Top decoration board 872 Upper left decoration board 873 Left lower decoration board 874 Upper right decoration board 875 Right lower decoration board 876 Lower panel illumination lighting board 877 Lower Panel illumination 900 Connector with harness 910 for body connection Connector with harness for body connection

Claims (3)

Three or more rotating display bodies to which at least a plurality of grand prize symbols and a plurality of small role symbols are attached;
A selecting means for performing a lottery according to the winning establishment for one or more roles of the plurality of roles,
Provided corresponding to said three or more rotating display member, each of the three or more rotary display body which is in rotation display state, and stopping operation means capable of stopping individually by stopping operation,
A table storage means for storing a plurality of sliding tables slip information is set to the winning combination on the winning establishment state based on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means,
As symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in the winning establishment state is displayed, and stop control means for performing stop control of the rotating display element based on one of the plurality of sliding tables,
Based on a combination of symbols straddling the three or more rotation display bodies displayed in a stopped manner, a prize granting means for granting a prize as a result of one game;
Among the plurality of grand view pattern sets only combination that corresponds to the grand prize combination, based on the combination of any appears, Grand game period which occurs the grand prize game period which the game in which the prize may be granted is performed across multiple game Means of occurrence,
A gaming machine comprising
As a game when there is a normal game period in which game control that is more disadvantageous to the player than the grand prize game period is performed over a plurality of games,
In order to prevent the grand prize game period from occurring, any one of a plurality of small character combinations to which a unique stop operation mode is assigned is displayed regardless of the stop operation performed by the player. Grand prize game period non-occurring game, and
In order to allow the grand prize game period to occur, it is a condition that only some of the small role symbol combinations among the plurality of small role symbol combinations cannot be displayed, and A game that can occur in the grand prize game period in which the grand prize symbol combination can be displayed when the player performs a stop operation in the assigned stop operation mode.
Can be executed any of a plurality of types of games including the above, and the partial small symbol combinations that cannot be displayed in the game that can occur in the grand prize game period can be changed each time the game is performed. Game execution means for controlling the game
Further comprising
The stop control means includes
In the grand prize game period possible game,
Even if both the grand prize symbol and the small role symbol are displayed based on the stop operation performed on the first rotation display body among all the rotation display bodies in the rotation display state, If grand prize symbols displayed is not the particular grand prize symbol are
When at least the first rotation display body is in the stop display state and the two or more rotation display bodies are in the rotation display state among all the rotation display bodies, among the two or more rotation display bodies the second rotation display member is any one rotation display of the grand prize symbol and also as the stopping operation is performed in both capable of displaying aspects of the small role symbol, the game is the grand prize game period To keep secret that it is a game that can occur,
Always, only a possibility that all of the rotating display member still appears that the grand view handle assembly only registration and the Small Win view pattern sets only combination of the small prize view pattern set only combination when a stop display state The game machine is characterized by having a game mode secret means for controlling the stop of the second rotating display body based on a secret table that is one of the sliding tables. A start operation means for starting the game;
Said selecting means includes claims acquires predetermined random number based on the fact that the start operation means is operated, perform the drawing according to the winning establishment for said one or more roles with the acquired random number The gaming machine according to 1. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising effect display means for displaying a predetermined effect image.